#pragma warning(push, 0)

// dear imgui, v1.75 WIP
// (widgets code)

/*

Index of this file:

// [SECTION] Forward Declarations
// [SECTION] Widgets: Text, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: Main (Button, Image, Checkbox, RadioButton, ProgressBar, Bullet, etc.)
// [SECTION] Widgets: Low-level Layout helpers (Spacing, Dummy, NewLine, Separator, etc.)
// [SECTION] Widgets: ComboBox
// [SECTION] Data Type and Data Formatting Helpers
// [SECTION] Widgets: DragScalar, DragFloat, DragInt, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: SliderScalar, SliderFloat, SliderInt, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: InputScalar, InputFloat, InputInt, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: InputText, InputTextMultiline
// [SECTION] Widgets: ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: TreeNode, CollapsingHeader, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: Selectable
// [SECTION] Widgets: ListBox
// [SECTION] Widgets: PlotLines, PlotHistogram
// [SECTION] Widgets: Value helpers
// [SECTION] Widgets: MenuItem, BeginMenu, EndMenu, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabBar, EndTabBar, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabItem, EndTabItem, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: Columns, BeginColumns, EndColumns, etc.

*/

#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS)
#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
#endif

#include "imgui.h"
#ifndef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
#endif
#include "imgui_internal.h"

#include <ctype.h>      // toupper
#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER <= 1500 // MSVC 2008 or earlier
#include <stddef.h>     // intptr_t
#else
#include <stdint.h>     // intptr_t
#endif

// Visual Studio warnings
#ifdef _MSC_VER
#pragma warning (disable: 4127) // condition expression is constant
#pragma warning (disable: 4996) // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen
#endif

// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything
#if defined(__clang__)
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"         // warning : use of old-style cast                              // yes, they are more terse.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal"            // warning : comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe   // storing and comparing against same constants (typically 0.0f) is ok.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral"      // warning : format string is not a string literal              // passing non-literal to vsnformat(). yes, user passing incorrect format strings can crash the code.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion"        // warning : implicit conversion changes signedness             //
#if __has_warning("-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant")
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant"  // warning : zero as null pointer constant              // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0
#endif
#if __has_warning("-Wdouble-promotion")
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion"       // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function  // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double.
#endif
#elif defined(__GNUC__)
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas"                  // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral"        // warning: format not a string literal, format string not checked
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess"          // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead
#endif

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Data
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Those MIN/MAX values are not define because we need to point to them
static const signed char    IM_S8_MIN  = -128;
static const signed char    IM_S8_MAX  = 127;
static const unsigned char  IM_U8_MIN  = 0;
static const unsigned char  IM_U8_MAX  = 0xFF;
static const signed short   IM_S16_MIN = -32768;
static const signed short   IM_S16_MAX = 32767;
static const unsigned short IM_U16_MIN = 0;
static const unsigned short IM_U16_MAX = 0xFFFF;
static const ImS32          IM_S32_MIN = INT_MIN;    // (-2147483647 - 1), (0x80000000);
static const ImS32          IM_S32_MAX = INT_MAX;    // (2147483647), (0x7FFFFFFF)
static const ImU32          IM_U32_MIN = 0;
static const ImU32          IM_U32_MAX = UINT_MAX;   // (0xFFFFFFFF)
#ifdef LLONG_MIN
static const ImS64          IM_S64_MIN = LLONG_MIN;  // (-9223372036854775807ll - 1ll);
static const ImS64          IM_S64_MAX = LLONG_MAX;  // (9223372036854775807ll);
#else
static const ImS64          IM_S64_MIN = -9223372036854775807LL - 1;
static const ImS64          IM_S64_MAX = 9223372036854775807LL;
#endif
static const ImU64          IM_U64_MIN = 0;
#ifdef ULLONG_MAX
static const ImU64          IM_U64_MAX = ULLONG_MAX; // (0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFull);
#else
static const ImU64          IM_U64_MAX = (2ULL * 9223372036854775807LL + 1);
#endif

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Forward Declarations
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// For InputTextEx()
static bool             InputTextFilterCharacter(unsigned int* p_char, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data);
static int              InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(char const* text_begin, char const** out_text_end);
static ImVec2           InputTextCalcTextSizeW(const ImWchar* text_begin, const ImWchar* text_end, const ImWchar** remaining = NULL, ImVec2* out_offset = NULL, bool stop_on_new_line = false);

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Text, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - TextEx() [Internal]
// - TextUnformatted()
// - Text()
// - TextV()
// - TextColored()
// - TextColoredV()
// - TextDisabled()
// - TextDisabledV()
// - TextWrapped()
// - TextWrappedV()
// - LabelText()
// - LabelTextV()
// - BulletText()
// - BulletTextV()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

void ImGui::TextEx(char const* text, char const* text_end, ImGuiTextFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(text != NULL);
    char const* text_begin = text;
    if (text_end == NULL)
        text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT

    const ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);
    float const wrap_pos_x = window->DC.TextWrapPos;
    bool const wrap_enabled = (wrap_pos_x >= 0.0f);
    if (text_end - text > 2000 && !wrap_enabled)
    {
        // Long text!
        // Perform manual coarse clipping to optimize for long multi-line text
        // - From this point we will only compute the width of lines that are visible. Optimization only available when word-wrapping is disabled.
        // - We also don't vertically center the text within the line full height, which is unlikely to matter because we are likely the biggest and only item on the line.
        // - We use memchr(), pay attention that well optimized versions of those str/mem functions are much faster than a casually written loop.
        char const* line = text;
        float const line_height = GetTextLineHeight();
        ImVec2 text_size(0,0);

        // Lines to skip (can't skip when logging text)
        ImVec2 pos = text_pos;
        if (!g.LogEnabled)
        {
            int lines_skippable = (int)((window->ClipRect.Min.y - text_pos.y) / line_height);
            if (lines_skippable > 0)
            {
                int lines_skipped = 0;
                while (line < text_end && lines_skipped < lines_skippable)
                {
                    char const* line_end = (char const*)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line);
                    if (!line_end)
                        line_end = text_end;
                    if ((flags & ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText) == 0)
                        text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, CalcTextSize(line, line_end).x);
                    line = line_end + 1;
                    lines_skipped++;
                }
                pos.y += lines_skipped * line_height;
            }
        }

        // Lines to render
        if (line < text_end)
        {
            ImRect line_rect(pos, pos + ImVec2(FLT_MAX, line_height));
            while (line < text_end)
            {
                if (IsClippedEx(line_rect, 0, false))
                    break;

                char const* line_end = (char const*)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line);
                if (!line_end)
                    line_end = text_end;
                text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, CalcTextSize(line, line_end).x);
                RenderText(pos, line, line_end, false);
                line = line_end + 1;
                line_rect.Min.y += line_height;
                line_rect.Max.y += line_height;
                pos.y += line_height;
            }

            // Count remaining lines
            int lines_skipped = 0;
            while (line < text_end)
            {
                char const* line_end = (char const*)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line);
                if (!line_end)
                    line_end = text_end;
                if ((flags & ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText) == 0)
                    text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, CalcTextSize(line, line_end).x);
                line = line_end + 1;
                lines_skipped++;
            }
            pos.y += lines_skipped * line_height;
        }
        text_size.y = (pos - text_pos).y;

        ImRect bb(text_pos, text_pos + text_size);
        ItemSize(text_size, 0.0f);
        ItemAdd(bb, 0);
    }
    else
    {
        float const wrap_width = wrap_enabled ? CalcWrapWidthForPos(window->DC.CursorPos, wrap_pos_x) : 0.0f;
        const ImVec2 text_size = CalcTextSize(text_begin, text_end, false, wrap_width);

        ImRect bb(text_pos, text_pos + text_size);
        ItemSize(text_size, 0.0f);
        if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
            return;

        // Render (we don't hide text after ## in this end-user function)
        RenderTextWrapped(bb.Min, text_begin, text_end, wrap_width);
    }
}

void ImGui::TextUnformatted(char const* text, char const* text_end)
{
    TextEx(text, text_end, ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText);
}

void ImGui::Text(char const* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    TextV(fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

void ImGui::TextV(char const* fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    char const* text_end = g.TempBuffer + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
    TextEx(g.TempBuffer, text_end, ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText);
}

void ImGui::TextColored(const ImVec4& col, char const* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    TextColoredV(col, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

void ImGui::TextColoredV(const ImVec4& col, char const* fmt, va_list args)
{
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, col);
    TextV(fmt, args);
    PopStyleColor();
}

void ImGui::TextDisabled(char const* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    TextDisabledV(fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

void ImGui::TextDisabledV(char const* fmt, va_list args)
{
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, GImGui->Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
    TextV(fmt, args);
    PopStyleColor();
}

void ImGui::TextWrapped(char const* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    TextWrappedV(fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

void ImGui::TextWrappedV(char const* fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    bool need_backup = (window->DC.TextWrapPos < 0.0f);  // Keep existing wrap position if one is already set
    if (need_backup)
        PushTextWrapPos(0.0f);
    TextV(fmt, args);
    if (need_backup)
        PopTextWrapPos();
}

void ImGui::LabelText(char const* label, char const* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    LabelTextV(label, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

// Add a label+text combo aligned to other label+value widgets
void ImGui::LabelTextV(char const* label, char const* fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    float const w = CalcItemWidth();

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImRect value_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2));
    const ImRect total_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f), style.FramePadding.y*2) + label_size);
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, 0))
        return;

    // Render
    char const* value_text_begin = &g.TempBuffer[0];
    char const* value_text_end = value_text_begin + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
    RenderTextClipped(value_bb.Min, value_bb.Max, value_text_begin, value_text_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.0f,0.5f));
    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(value_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, value_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
}

void ImGui::BulletText(char const* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    BulletTextV(fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

// Text with a little bullet aligned to the typical tree node.
void ImGui::BulletTextV(char const* fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    char const* text_begin = g.TempBuffer;
    char const* text_end = text_begin + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(text_begin, text_end, false);
    const ImVec2 total_size = ImVec2(g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? (label_size.x + style.FramePadding.x * 2) : 0.0f), label_size.y);  // Empty text doesn't add padding
    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    pos.y += window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset;
    ItemSize(total_size, 0.0f);
    const ImRect bb(pos, pos + total_size);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
        return;

    // Render
    ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    RenderBullet(window->DrawList, bb.Min + ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize*0.5f, g.FontSize*0.5f), text_col);
    RenderText(bb.Min + ImVec2(g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x * 2, 0.0f), text_begin, text_end, false);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Main
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - ButtonBehavior() [Internal]
// - Button()
// - SmallButton()
// - InvisibleButton()
// - ArrowButton()
// - CloseButton() [Internal]
// - CollapseButton() [Internal]
// - ScrollbarEx() [Internal]
// - Scrollbar() [Internal]
// - Image()
// - ImageButton()
// - Checkbox()
// - CheckboxFlags()
// - RadioButton()
// - ProgressBar()
// - Bullet()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// The ButtonBehavior() function is key to many interactions and used by many/most widgets.
// Because we handle so many cases (keyboard/gamepad navigation, drag and drop) and many specific behavior (via ImGuiButtonFlags_),
// this code is a little complex.
// By far the most common path is interacting with the Mouse using the default ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease button behavior.
// See the series of events below and the corresponding state reported by dear imgui:
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// with PressedOnClickRelease:             return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
//   Frame N+0 (mouse is outside bb)        -             -                -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+1 (mouse moves inside bb)      -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            true               -                    true
//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+4 (mouse moves outside bb)     -             -                true            -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+5 (mouse moves inside bb)      -             true             true            -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   true          true             -               -                  true                 -
//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+8 (mouse moves outside bb)     -             -                -               -                  -                    -
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// with PressedOnClick:                    return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is down)       true          true             true            true               -                    true
//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  true                 -
//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// with PressedOnRelease:                  return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    true
//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   true          true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// with PressedOnDoubleClick:              return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
//   Frame N+0 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    true
//   Frame N+1 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+4 (mouse button is down)       true          true             true            true               -                    true
//   Frame N+5 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  true                 -
//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Note that some combinations are supported,
// - PressedOnDragDropHold can generally be associated with any flag.
// - PressedOnDoubleClick can be associated by PressedOnClickRelease/PressedOnRelease, in which case the second release event won't be reported.
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// The behavior of the return-value changes when ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat is set:
//                                         Repeat+                  Repeat+           Repeat+             Repeat+
//                                         PressedOnClickRelease    PressedOnClick    PressedOnRelease    PressedOnDoubleClick
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
//   Frame N+0 (mouse button is down)       -                        true              -                   true
//   ...                                    -                        -                 -                   -
//   Frame N + RepeatDelay                  true                     true              -                   true
//   ...                                    -                        -                 -                   -
//   Frame N + RepeatDelay + RepeatRate*N   true                     true              -                   true
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

bool ImGui::ButtonBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, bool* out_hovered, bool* out_held, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();

    if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Disabled)
    {
        if (out_hovered) *out_hovered = false;
        if (out_held) *out_held = false;
        if (g.ActiveId == id) ClearActiveID();
        return false;
    }

    // Default behavior requires click+release on same spot
    if ((flags & (ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick)) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease;

    ImGuiWindow* backup_hovered_window = g.HoveredWindow;
    bool const flatten_hovered_children = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren) && g.HoveredRootWindow == window->RootWindow;
    if (flatten_hovered_children)
        g.HoveredWindow = window;

#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
    if (id != 0 && window->DC.LastItemId != id)
        ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemAdd(&g, bb, id);
#endif

    bool pressed = false;
    bool hovered = ItemHoverable(bb, id);

    // Drag source doesn't report as hovered
    if (hovered && g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == id && !(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoDisableHover))
        hovered = false;

    // Special mode for Drag and Drop where holding button pressed for a long time while dragging another item triggers the button
    if (g.DragDropActive && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold) && !(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoHoldToOpenOthers))
        if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem))
        {
            hovered = true;
            SetHoveredID(id);
            if (CalcTypematicRepeatAmount(g.HoveredIdTimer + 0.0001f - g.IO.DeltaTime, g.HoveredIdTimer + 0.0001f, 0.70f, 0.00f))
            {
                pressed = true;
                FocusWindow(window);
            }
        }

    if (flatten_hovered_children)
        g.HoveredWindow = backup_hovered_window;

    // AllowOverlap mode (rarely used) requires previous frame HoveredId to be null or to match. This allows using patterns where a later submitted widget overlaps a previous one.
    if (hovered && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap) && (g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != id && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0))
        hovered = false;

    // Mouse
    if (hovered)
    {
        if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers) || (!g.IO.KeyCtrl && !g.IO.KeyShift && !g.IO.KeyAlt))
        {
            if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease) && g.IO.MouseClicked[0])
            {
                SetActiveID(id, window);
                if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
                    SetFocusID(id, window);
                FocusWindow(window);
            }
            if (((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick) && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]) || ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0]))
            {
                pressed = true;
                if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveID)
                    ClearActiveID();
                else
                    SetActiveID(id, window); // Hold on ID
                FocusWindow(window);
            }
            if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease) && g.IO.MouseReleased[0])
            {
                if (!((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) && g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[0] >= g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay))  // Repeat mode trumps <on release>
                    pressed = true;
                ClearActiveID();
            }

            // 'Repeat' mode acts when held regardless of _PressedOn flags (see table above).
            // Relies on repeat logic of IsMouseClicked() but we may as well do it ourselves if we end up exposing finer RepeatDelay/RepeatRate settings.
            if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) && g.ActiveId == id && g.IO.MouseDownDuration[0] > 0.0f && IsMouseClicked(0, true))
                pressed = true;
        }

        if (pressed)
            g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
    }

    // Gamepad/Keyboard navigation
    // We report navigated item as hovered but we don't set g.HoveredId to not interfere with mouse.
    if (g.NavId == id && !g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == id || g.ActiveId == window->MoveId))
        if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoveredOnNav))
            hovered = true;

    if (g.NavActivateDownId == id)
    {
        bool nav_activated_by_code = (g.NavActivateId == id);
        bool nav_activated_by_inputs = IsNavInputTest(ImGuiNavInput_Activate, (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) ? ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat : ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed);
        if (nav_activated_by_code || nav_activated_by_inputs)
            pressed = true;
        if (nav_activated_by_code || nav_activated_by_inputs || g.ActiveId == id)
        {
            // Set active id so it can be queried by user via IsItemActive(), equivalent of holding the mouse button.
            g.NavActivateId = id; // This is so SetActiveId assign a Nav source
            SetActiveID(id, window);
            if ((nav_activated_by_code || nav_activated_by_inputs) && !(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
                SetFocusID(id, window);
        }
    }

    bool held = false;
    if (g.ActiveId == id)
    {
        if (pressed)
            g.ActiveIdHasBeenPressedBefore = true;
        if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse)
        {
            if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
                g.ActiveIdClickOffset = g.IO.MousePos - bb.Min;
            if (g.IO.MouseDown[0])
            {
                held = true;
            }
            else
            {
                if (hovered && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease) && !g.DragDropActive)
                {
                    bool is_double_click_release = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseDownWasDoubleClick[0];
                    bool is_repeating_already = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) && g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[0] >= g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay; // Repeat mode trumps <on release>
                    if (!is_double_click_release && !is_repeating_already)
                        pressed = true;
                }
                ClearActiveID();
            }
            if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
                g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
        }
        else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
        {
            if (g.NavActivateDownId != id)
                ClearActiveID();
        }
    }

    if (out_hovered) *out_hovered = hovered;
    if (out_held) *out_held = held;

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::ButtonEx(char const* label, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine) && style.FramePadding.y < window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset) // Try to vertically align buttons that are smaller/have no padding so that text baseline matches (bit hacky, since it shouldn't be a flag)
        pos.y += window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset - style.FramePadding.y;
    ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, label_size.x + style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);

    const ImRect bb(pos, pos + size);
    ItemSize(size, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    if (window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat)
        flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat;
    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags);

    // Render
    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, style.FrameRounding);
    RenderTextClipped(bb.Min + style.FramePadding, bb.Max - style.FramePadding, label, NULL, &label_size, style.ButtonTextAlign, &bb);

    // Automatically close popups
    //if (pressed && !(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
    //    CloseCurrentPopup();

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags);
    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::Button(char const* label, const ImVec2& size_arg)
{
    return ButtonEx(label, size_arg, 0);
}

// Small buttons fits within text without additional vertical spacing.
bool ImGui::SmallButton(char const* label)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    float backup_padding_y = g.Style.FramePadding.y;
    g.Style.FramePadding.y = 0.0f;
    bool pressed = ButtonEx(label, ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine);
    g.Style.FramePadding.y = backup_padding_y;
    return pressed;
}

// Tip: use ImGui::PushID()/PopID() to push indices or pointers in the ID stack.
// Then you can keep 'str_id' empty or the same for all your buttons (instead of creating a string based on a non-string id)
bool ImGui::InvisibleButton(char const* str_id, const ImVec2& size_arg)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    // Cannot use zero-size for InvisibleButton(). Unlike Button() there is not way to fallback using the label size.
    IM_ASSERT(size_arg.x != 0.0f && size_arg.y != 0.0f);

    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
    ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, 0.0f, 0.0f);
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    ItemSize(size);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::ArrowButtonEx(char const* str_id, ImGuiDir dir, ImVec2 size, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    float const default_size = GetFrameHeight();
    ItemSize(size, (size.y >= default_size) ? g.Style.FramePadding.y : -1.0f);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    if (window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat)
        flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags);

    // Render
    const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
    const ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, bg_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);
    RenderArrow(window->DrawList, bb.Min + ImVec2(ImMax(0.0f, (size.x - g.FontSize) * 0.5f), ImMax(0.0f, (size.y - g.FontSize) * 0.5f)), text_col, dir);

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::ArrowButton(char const* str_id, ImGuiDir dir)
{
    float sz = GetFrameHeight();
    return ArrowButtonEx(str_id, dir, ImVec2(sz, sz), 0);
}

// Button to close a window
bool ImGui::CloseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos)//, float size)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    // We intentionally allow interaction when clipped so that a mechanical Alt,Right,Validate sequence close a window.
    // (this isn't the regular behavior of buttons, but it doesn't affect the user much because navigation tends to keep items visible).
    const ImRect bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, g.FontSize) + g.Style.FramePadding * 2.0f);
    bool is_clipped = !ItemAdd(bb, id);

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);
    if (is_clipped)
        return pressed;

    // Render
    ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered);
    ImVec2 center = bb.GetCenter();
    if (hovered)
        window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, ImMax(2.0f, g.FontSize * 0.5f + 1.0f), col, 12);

    float cross_extent = g.FontSize * 0.5f * 0.7071f - 1.0f;
    ImU32 cross_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    center -= ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f);
    window->DrawList->AddLine(center + ImVec2(+cross_extent,+cross_extent), center + ImVec2(-cross_extent,-cross_extent), cross_col, 1.0f);
    window->DrawList->AddLine(center + ImVec2(+cross_extent,-cross_extent), center + ImVec2(-cross_extent,+cross_extent), cross_col, 1.0f);

    return pressed;
}

// The Collapse button also functions as a Dock Menu button.
bool ImGui::CollapseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiDockNode* dock_node)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    ImRect bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, g.FontSize) + g.Style.FramePadding * 2.0f);
    ItemAdd(bb, id);
    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_None);

    // Render
    //bool is_dock_menu = (window->DockNodeAsHost && !window->Collapsed);
    ImVec2 off = dock_node ? ImVec2(IM_FLOOR(-g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x * 0.5f) + 0.5f, 0.0f) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
    ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    ImVec2 center = bb.GetCenter();
    if (hovered || held)
        window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center + off + ImVec2(0,-0.5f), g.FontSize * 0.5f + 1.0f, bg_col, 12);

    if (dock_node)
        RenderArrowDockMenu(window->DrawList, bb.Min + g.Style.FramePadding, g.FontSize, text_col);
    else
        RenderArrow(window->DrawList, bb.Min + g.Style.FramePadding, text_col, window->Collapsed ? ImGuiDir_Right : ImGuiDir_Down, 1.0f);

    // Switch to moving the window after mouse is moved beyond the initial drag threshold
    if (IsItemActive() && IsMouseDragging(0))
        StartMouseMovingWindowOrNode(window, dock_node, true);

    return pressed;
}

ImGuiID ImGui::GetWindowScrollbarID(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiAxis axis)
{
    return window->GetIDNoKeepAlive(axis == ImGuiAxis_X ? "#SCROLLX" : "#SCROLLY");
}

// Vertical/Horizontal scrollbar
// The entire piece of code below is rather confusing because:
// - We handle absolute seeking (when first clicking outside the grab) and relative manipulation (afterward or when clicking inside the grab)
// - We store values as normalized ratio and in a form that allows the window content to change while we are holding on a scrollbar
// - We handle both horizontal and vertical scrollbars, which makes the terminology not ideal.
// Still, the code should probably be made simpler..
bool ImGui::ScrollbarEx(const ImRect& bb_frame, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, float* p_scroll_v, float size_avail_v, float size_contents_v, ImDrawCornerFlags rounding_corners)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    float const bb_frame_width = bb_frame.GetWidth();
    float const bb_frame_height = bb_frame.GetHeight();
    if (bb_frame_width <= 0.0f || bb_frame_height <= 0.0f)
        return false;

    // When we are too small, start hiding and disabling the grab (this reduce visual noise on very small window and facilitate using the resize grab)
    float alpha = 1.0f;
    if ((axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) && bb_frame_height < g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f)
        alpha = ImSaturate((bb_frame_height - g.FontSize) / (g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
    if (alpha <= 0.0f)
        return false;

    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    bool const allow_interaction = (alpha >= 1.0f);
    bool const horizontal = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X);

    ImRect bb = bb_frame;
    bb.Expand(ImVec2(-ImClamp(IM_FLOOR((bb_frame_width - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f), -ImClamp(IM_FLOOR((bb_frame_height - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f)));

    // V denote the main, longer axis of the scrollbar (= height for a vertical scrollbar)
    float const scrollbar_size_v = horizontal ? bb.GetWidth() : bb.GetHeight();

    // Calculate the height of our grabbable box. It generally represent the amount visible (vs the total scrollable amount)
    // But we maintain a minimum size in pixel to allow for the user to still aim inside.
    IM_ASSERT(ImMax(size_contents_v, size_avail_v) > 0.0f); // Adding this assert to check if the ImMax(XXX,1.0f) is still needed. PLEASE CONTACT ME if this triggers.
    float const win_size_v = ImMax(ImMax(size_contents_v, size_avail_v), 1.0f);
    float const grab_h_pixels = ImClamp(scrollbar_size_v * (size_avail_v / win_size_v), style.GrabMinSize, scrollbar_size_v);
    float const grab_h_norm = grab_h_pixels / scrollbar_size_v;

    // Handle input right away. None of the code of Begin() is relying on scrolling position before calling Scrollbar().
    bool held = false;
    bool hovered = false;
    ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus);

    float scroll_max = ImMax(1.0f, size_contents_v - size_avail_v);
    float scroll_ratio = ImSaturate(*p_scroll_v / scroll_max);
    float grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v;
    if (held && allow_interaction && grab_h_norm < 1.0f)
    {
        float scrollbar_pos_v = horizontal ? bb.Min.x : bb.Min.y;
        float mouse_pos_v = horizontal ? g.IO.MousePos.x : g.IO.MousePos.y;

        // Click position in scrollbar normalized space (0.0f->1.0f)
        float const clicked_v_norm = ImSaturate((mouse_pos_v - scrollbar_pos_v) / scrollbar_size_v);
        SetHoveredID(id);

        bool seek_absolute = false;
        if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
        {
            // On initial click calculate the distance between mouse and the center of the grab
            seek_absolute = (clicked_v_norm < grab_v_norm || clicked_v_norm > grab_v_norm + grab_h_norm);
            if (seek_absolute)
                g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = 0.0f;
            else
                g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm * 0.5f;
        }

        // Apply scroll
        // It is ok to modify Scroll here because we are being called in Begin() after the calculation of ContentSize and before setting up our starting position
        float const scroll_v_norm = ImSaturate((clicked_v_norm - g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter - grab_h_norm * 0.5f) / (1.0f - grab_h_norm));
        *p_scroll_v = IM_ROUND(scroll_v_norm * scroll_max);//(win_size_contents_v - win_size_v));

        // Update values for rendering
        scroll_ratio = ImSaturate(*p_scroll_v / scroll_max);
        grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v;

        // Update distance to grab now that we have seeked and saturated
        if (seek_absolute)
            g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm * 0.5f;
    }

    // Render
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_frame.Min, bb_frame.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg), window->WindowRounding, rounding_corners);
    const ImU32 grab_col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered : ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab, alpha);
    ImRect grab_rect;
    if (horizontal)
        grab_rect = ImRect(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm), bb.Min.y, ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels, bb.Max.y);
    else
        grab_rect = ImRect(bb.Min.x, ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm), bb.Max.x, ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels);
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_rect.Min, grab_rect.Max, grab_col, style.ScrollbarRounding);

    return held;
}

void ImGui::Scrollbar(ImGuiAxis axis)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    const ImGuiID id = GetWindowScrollbarID(window, axis);
    KeepAliveID(id);

    // Calculate scrollbar bounding box
    const ImRect outer_rect = window->Rect();
    const ImRect inner_rect = window->InnerRect;
    float const border_size = window->WindowBorderSize;
    float const scrollbar_size = window->ScrollbarSizes[axis ^ 1];
    IM_ASSERT(scrollbar_size > 0.0f);
    float const other_scrollbar_size = window->ScrollbarSizes[axis];
    ImDrawCornerFlags rounding_corners = (other_scrollbar_size <= 0.0f) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight : 0;
    ImRect bb;
    if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X)
    {
        bb.Min = ImVec2(inner_rect.Min.x, ImMax(outer_rect.Min.y, outer_rect.Max.y - border_size - scrollbar_size));
        bb.Max = ImVec2(inner_rect.Max.x, outer_rect.Max.y);
        rounding_corners |= ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft;
    }
    else
    {
        bb.Min = ImVec2(ImMax(outer_rect.Min.x, outer_rect.Max.x - border_size - scrollbar_size), inner_rect.Min.y);
        bb.Max = ImVec2(outer_rect.Max.x, window->InnerRect.Max.y);
        rounding_corners |= ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar)) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight : 0;
    }
    ScrollbarEx(bb, id, axis, &window->Scroll[axis], inner_rect.Max[axis] - inner_rect.Min[axis], window->ContentSize[axis] + window->WindowPadding[axis] * 2.0f, rounding_corners);
}

void ImGui::Image(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec4& tint_col, const ImVec4& border_col)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    if (border_col.w > 0.0f)
        bb.Max += ImVec2(2, 2);
    ItemSize(bb);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
        return;

    if (border_col.w > 0.0f)
    {
        window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(border_col), 0.0f);
        window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, bb.Min + ImVec2(1, 1), bb.Max - ImVec2(1, 1), uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));
    }
    else
    {
        window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, bb.Min, bb.Max, uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));
    }
}

// frame_padding < 0: uses FramePadding from style (default)
// frame_padding = 0: no framing
// frame_padding > 0: set framing size
// The color used are the button colors.
bool ImGui::ImageButton(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, int frame_padding, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    // Default to using texture ID as ID. User can still push string/integer prefixes.
    // We could hash the size/uv to create a unique ID but that would prevent the user from animating UV.
    PushID((void*)(intptr_t)user_texture_id);
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID("#image");
    PopID();

    const ImVec2 padding = (frame_padding >= 0) ? ImVec2((float)frame_padding, (float)frame_padding) : style.FramePadding;
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size + padding * 2);
    const ImRect image_bb(window->DC.CursorPos + padding, window->DC.CursorPos + padding + size);
    ItemSize(bb);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);

    // Render
    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, ImClamp((float)ImMin(padding.x, padding.y), 0.0f, style.FrameRounding));
    if (bg_col.w > 0.0f)
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(image_bb.Min, image_bb.Max, GetColorU32(bg_col));
    window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, image_bb.Min, image_bb.Max, uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::Checkbox(char const* label, bool* v)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    float const square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    const ImRect total_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(total_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
    if (pressed)
    {
        *v = !(*v);
        MarkItemEdited(id);
    }

    const ImRect check_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz, square_sz));
    RenderNavHighlight(total_bb, id);
    RenderFrame(check_bb.Min, check_bb.Max, GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
    ImU32 check_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark);
    if (window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_MixedValue)
    {
        // Undocumented tristate/mixed/indeterminate checkbox (#2644)
        ImVec2 pad(ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 3.6f)), ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 3.6f)));
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(check_bb.Min + pad, check_bb.Max - pad, check_col, style.FrameRounding);
    }
    else if (*v)
    {
        float const pad = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 6.0f));
        RenderCheckMark(check_bb.Min + ImVec2(pad, pad), check_col, square_sz - pad*2.0f);
    }

    if (g.LogEnabled)
        LogRenderedText(&total_bb.Min, *v ? "[x]" : "[ ]");
    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(check_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, check_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable | (*v ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked : 0));
    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(char const* label, unsigned int* flags, unsigned int flags_value)
{
    bool v = ((*flags & flags_value) == flags_value);
    bool pressed = Checkbox(label, &v);
    if (pressed)
    {
        if (v)
            *flags |= flags_value;
        else
            *flags &= ~flags_value;
    }

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::RadioButton(char const* label, bool active)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    float const square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    const ImRect check_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz, square_sz));
    const ImRect total_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id))
        return false;

    ImVec2 center = check_bb.GetCenter();
    center.x = IM_ROUND(center.x);
    center.y = IM_ROUND(center.y);
    float const radius = (square_sz - 1.0f) * 0.5f;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(total_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
    if (pressed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    RenderNavHighlight(total_bb, id);
    window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, radius, GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg), 16);
    if (active)
    {
        float const pad = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 6.0f));
        window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, radius - pad, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark), 16);
    }

    if (style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f)
    {
        window->DrawList->AddCircle(center + ImVec2(1,1), radius, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), 16, style.FrameBorderSize);
        window->DrawList->AddCircle(center, radius, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), 16, style.FrameBorderSize);
    }

    if (g.LogEnabled)
        LogRenderedText(&total_bb.Min, active ? "(x)" : "( )");
    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(check_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, check_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    return pressed;
}

// FIXME: This would work nicely if it was a public template, e.g. 'template<T> RadioButton(char const* label, T* v, T v_button)', but I'm not sure how we would expose it..
bool ImGui::RadioButton(char const* label, int* v, int v_button)
{
    bool const pressed = RadioButton(label, *v == v_button);
    if (pressed)
        *v = v_button;
    return pressed;
}

// size_arg (for each axis) < 0.0f: align to end, 0.0f: auto, > 0.0f: specified size
void ImGui::ProgressBar(float fraction, const ImVec2& size_arg, char const* overlay)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f);
    ImRect bb(pos, pos + size);
    ItemSize(size, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
        return;

    // Render
    fraction = ImSaturate(fraction);
    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
    bb.Expand(ImVec2(-style.FrameBorderSize, -style.FrameBorderSize));
    const ImVec2 fill_br = ImVec2(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, fraction), bb.Max.y);
    RenderRectFilledRangeH(window->DrawList, bb, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram), 0.0f, fraction, style.FrameRounding);

    // Default displaying the fraction as percentage string, but user can override it
    char overlay_buf[32];
    if (!overlay)
    {
        ImFormatString(overlay_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(overlay_buf), "%.0f%%", fraction*100+0.01f);
        overlay = overlay_buf;
    }

    ImVec2 overlay_size = CalcTextSize(overlay, NULL);
    if (overlay_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(ImClamp(fill_br.x + style.ItemSpacing.x, bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x - overlay_size.x - style.ItemInnerSpacing.x), bb.Min.y), bb.Max, overlay, NULL, &overlay_size, ImVec2(0.0f,0.5f), &bb);
}

void ImGui::Bullet()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    float const line_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y*2), g.FontSize);
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, line_height));
    ItemSize(bb);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
    {
        SameLine(0, style.FramePadding.x*2);
        return;
    }

    // Render and stay on same line
    ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    RenderBullet(window->DrawList, bb.Min + ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize*0.5f, line_height*0.5f), text_col);
    SameLine(0, style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Low-level Layout helpers
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - Spacing()
// - Dummy()
// - NewLine()
// - AlignTextToFramePadding()
// - SeparatorEx() [Internal]
// - Separator()
// - SplitterBehavior() [Internal]
// - ShrinkWidths() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

void ImGui::Spacing()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;
    ItemSize(ImVec2(0,0));
}

void ImGui::Dummy(const ImVec2& size)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    ItemSize(size);
    ItemAdd(bb, 0);
}

void ImGui::NewLine()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiLayoutType backup_layout_type = window->DC.LayoutType;
    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
    if (window->DC.CurrLineSize.y > 0.0f)     // In the event that we are on a line with items that is smaller that FontSize high, we will preserve its height.
        ItemSize(ImVec2(0,0));
    else
        ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, g.FontSize));
    window->DC.LayoutType = backup_layout_type;
}

void ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    window->DC.CurrLineSize.y = ImMax(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
    window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = ImMax(window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset, g.Style.FramePadding.y);
}

// Horizontal/vertical separating line
void ImGui::SeparatorEx(ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & (ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal | ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical)));   // Check that only 1 option is selected

    float thickness_draw = 1.0f;
    float thickness_layout = 0.0f;
    if (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical)
    {
        // Vertical separator, for menu bars (use current line height). Not exposed because it is misleading and it doesn't have an effect on regular layout.
        float y1 = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
        float y2 = window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineSize.y;
        const ImRect bb(ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x, y1), ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x + thickness_draw, y2));
        ItemSize(ImVec2(thickness_layout, 0.0f));
        if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
            return;

        // Draw
        window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(bb.Min.x, bb.Min.y), ImVec2(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator));
        if (g.LogEnabled)
            LogText(" |");
    }
    else if (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal)
    {
        // Horizontal Separator
        float x1 = window->Pos.x;
        float x2 = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x;
        if (!window->DC.GroupStack.empty())
            x1 += window->DC.Indent.x;

        ImGuiColumns* columns = (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_SpanAllColumns) ? window->DC.CurrentColumns : NULL;
        if (columns)
            PushColumnsBackground();

        // We don't provide our width to the layout so that it doesn't get feed back into AutoFit
        const ImRect bb(ImVec2(x1, window->DC.CursorPos.y), ImVec2(x2, window->DC.CursorPos.y + thickness_draw));
        ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, thickness_layout));
        bool const item_visible = ItemAdd(bb, 0);
        if (item_visible)
        {
            // Draw
            window->DrawList->AddLine(bb.Min, ImVec2(bb.Max.x, bb.Min.y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator));
            if (g.LogEnabled)
                LogRenderedText(&bb.Min, "--------------------------------");
        }
        if (columns)
        {
            PopColumnsBackground();
            columns->LineMinY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
        }
    }
}

void ImGui::Separator()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    // Those flags should eventually be overridable by the user
    ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags = (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal) ? ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical : ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal;
    flags |= ImGuiSeparatorFlags_SpanAllColumns;
    SeparatorEx(flags);
}

// Using 'hover_visibility_delay' allows us to hide the highlight and mouse cursor for a short time, which can be convenient to reduce visual noise.
bool ImGui::SplitterBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, float* size1, float* size2, float min_size1, float min_size2, float hover_extend, float hover_visibility_delay)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags_backup = window->DC.ItemFlags;
    window->DC.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus;
    bool item_add = ItemAdd(bb, id);
    window->DC.ItemFlags = item_flags_backup;
    if (!item_add)
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
    ImRect bb_interact = bb;
    bb_interact.Expand(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImVec2(0.0f, hover_extend) : ImVec2(hover_extend, 0.0f));
    ButtonBehavior(bb_interact, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren | ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap);
    if (g.ActiveId != id)
        SetItemAllowOverlap();

    if (held || (g.HoveredId == id && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == id && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay))
        SetMouseCursor(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW);

    ImRect bb_render = bb;
    if (held)
    {
        ImVec2 mouse_delta_2d = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset - bb_interact.Min;
        float mouse_delta = (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) ? mouse_delta_2d.y : mouse_delta_2d.x;

        // Minimum pane size
        float size_1_maximum_delta = ImMax(0.0f, *size1 - min_size1);
        float size_2_maximum_delta = ImMax(0.0f, *size2 - min_size2);
        if (mouse_delta < -size_1_maximum_delta)
            mouse_delta = -size_1_maximum_delta;
        if (mouse_delta > size_2_maximum_delta)
            mouse_delta = size_2_maximum_delta;

        // Apply resize
        if (mouse_delta != 0.0f)
        {
            if (mouse_delta < 0.0f)
                IM_ASSERT(*size1 + mouse_delta >= min_size1);
            if (mouse_delta > 0.0f)
                IM_ASSERT(*size2 - mouse_delta >= min_size2);
            *size1 += mouse_delta;
            *size2 -= mouse_delta;
            bb_render.Translate((axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImVec2(mouse_delta, 0.0f) : ImVec2(0.0f, mouse_delta));
            MarkItemEdited(id);
        }
    }

    // Render
    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : (hovered && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay) ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered : ImGuiCol_Separator);
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_render.Min, bb_render.Max, col, 0.0f);

    return held;
}

static int IMGUI_CDECL ShrinkWidthItemComparer(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
{
    const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem* a = (const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem*)lhs;
    const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem* b = (const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem*)rhs;
    if (int d = (int)(b->Width - a->Width))
        return d;
    return (b->Index - a->Index);
}

// Shrink excess width from a set of item, by removing width from the larger items first.
void ImGui::ShrinkWidths(ImGuiShrinkWidthItem* items, int count, float width_excess)
{
    if (count == 1)
    {
        items[0].Width = ImMax(items[0].Width - width_excess, 1.0f);
        return;
    }
    ImQsort(items, (size_t)count, sizeof(ImGuiShrinkWidthItem), ShrinkWidthItemComparer);
    int count_same_width = 1;
    while (width_excess > 0.0f && count_same_width < count)
    {
        while (count_same_width < count && items[0].Width <= items[count_same_width].Width)
            count_same_width++;
        float max_width_to_remove_per_item = (count_same_width < count) ? (items[0].Width - items[count_same_width].Width) : (items[0].Width - 1.0f);
        float width_to_remove_per_item = ImMin(width_excess / count_same_width, max_width_to_remove_per_item);
        for (int item_n = 0; item_n < count_same_width; item_n++)
            items[item_n].Width -= width_to_remove_per_item;
        width_excess -= width_to_remove_per_item * count_same_width;
    }

    // Round width and redistribute remainder left-to-right (could make it an option of the function?)
    // Ensure that e.g. the right-most tab of a shrunk tab-bar always reaches exactly at the same distance from the right-most edge of the tab bar separator.
    width_excess = 0.0f;
    for (int n = 0; n < count; n++)
    {
        float width_rounded = ImFloor(items[n].Width);
        width_excess += items[n].Width - width_rounded;
        items[n].Width = width_rounded;
    }
    if (width_excess > 0.0f)
        for (int n = 0; n < count; n++)
            if (items[n].Index < (int)(width_excess + 0.01f))
                items[n].Width += 1.0f;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: ComboBox
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - BeginCombo()
// - EndCombo()
// - Combo()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

static float CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(int items_count)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (items_count <= 0)
        return FLT_MAX;
    return (g.FontSize + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y) * items_count - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y + (g.Style.WindowPadding.y * 2);
}

bool ImGui::BeginCombo(char const* label, char const* preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags flags)
{
    // Always consume the SetNextWindowSizeConstraint() call in our early return paths
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    bool has_window_size_constraint = (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint) != 0;
    g.NextWindowData.Flags &= ~ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint;

    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)) != (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)); // Can't use both flags together

    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);

    float const arrow_size = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton) ? 0.0f : GetFrameHeight();
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    float const expected_w = CalcItemWidth();
    float const w = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview) ? arrow_size : expected_w;
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(frame_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
    bool popup_open = IsPopupOpen(id);

    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    float const value_x2 = ImMax(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Max.x - arrow_size);
    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(frame_bb.Min, ImVec2(value_x2, frame_bb.Max.y), frame_col, style.FrameRounding, (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_All : ImDrawCornerFlags_Left);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton))
    {
        ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((popup_open || hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
        ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(value_x2, frame_bb.Min.y), frame_bb.Max, bg_col, style.FrameRounding, (w <= arrow_size) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_All : ImDrawCornerFlags_Right);
        if (value_x2 + arrow_size - style.FramePadding.x <= frame_bb.Max.x)
            RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(value_x2 + style.FramePadding.y, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), text_col, ImGuiDir_Down, 1.0f);
    }
    RenderFrameBorder(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, style.FrameRounding);
    if (preview_value != NULL && !(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
        RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, ImVec2(value_x2, frame_bb.Max.y), preview_value, NULL, NULL, ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f));
    if (label_size.x > 0)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    if ((pressed || g.NavActivateId == id) && !popup_open)
    {
        if (window->DC.NavLayerCurrent == 0)
            window->NavLastIds[0] = id;
        OpenPopupEx(id);
        popup_open = true;
    }

    if (!popup_open)
        return false;

    if (has_window_size_constraint)
    {
        g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint;
        g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x = ImMax(g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x, w);
    }
    else
    {
        if ((flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_) == 0)
            flags |= ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular;
        IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_));    // Only one
        int popup_max_height_in_items = -1;
        if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular)     popup_max_height_in_items = 8;
        else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall)  popup_max_height_in_items = 4;
        else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge)  popup_max_height_in_items = 20;
        SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(w, 0.0f), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items)));
    }

    char name[16];
    ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Combo_%02d", g.BeginPopupStack.Size); // Recycle windows based on depth

    // Peak into expected window size so we can position it
    if (ImGuiWindow* popup_window = FindWindowByName(name))
        if (popup_window->WasActive)
        {
            ImVec2 size_expected = CalcWindowExpectedSize(popup_window);
            if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft)
                popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection = ImGuiDir_Left;
            ImRect r_outer = GetWindowAllowedExtentRect(popup_window);
            ImVec2 pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(frame_bb.GetBL(), size_expected, &popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, frame_bb, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox);
            SetNextWindowPos(pos);
        }

    // We don't use BeginPopupEx() solely because we have a custom name string, which we could make an argument to BeginPopupEx()
    ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove;

    // Horizontally align ourselves with the framed text
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, style.WindowPadding.y));
    bool ret = Begin(name, NULL, window_flags);
    PopStyleVar();
    if (!ret)
    {
        EndPopup();
        IM_ASSERT(0);   // This should never happen as we tested for IsPopupOpen() above
        return false;
    }
    return true;
}

void ImGui::EndCombo()
{
    EndPopup();
}

// Getter for the old Combo() API: char const*[]
static bool Items_ArrayGetter(void* data, int idx, char const** out_text)
{
    char const* const* items = (char const* const*)data;
    if (out_text)
        *out_text = items[idx];
    return true;
}

// Getter for the old Combo() API: "item1\0item2\0item3\0"
static bool Items_SingleStringGetter(void* data, int idx, char const** out_text)
{
    // FIXME-OPT: we could pre-compute the indices to fasten this. But only 1 active combo means the waste is limited.
    char const* items_separated_by_zeros = (char const*)data;
    int items_count = 0;
    char const* p = items_separated_by_zeros;
    while (*p)
    {
        if (idx == items_count)
            break;
        p += strlen(p) + 1;
        items_count++;
    }
    if (!*p)
        return false;
    if (out_text)
        *out_text = p;
    return true;
}

// Old API, prefer using BeginCombo() nowadays if you can.
bool ImGui::Combo(char const* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, char const**), void* data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    // Call the getter to obtain the preview string which is a parameter to BeginCombo()
    char const* preview_value = NULL;
    if (*current_item >= 0 && *current_item < items_count)
        items_getter(data, *current_item, &preview_value);

    // The old Combo() API exposed "popup_max_height_in_items". The new more general BeginCombo() API doesn't have/need it, but we emulate it here.
    if (popup_max_height_in_items != -1 && !(g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint))
        SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items)));

    if (!BeginCombo(label, preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags_None))
        return false;

    // Display items
    // FIXME-OPT: Use clipper (but we need to disable it on the appearing frame to make sure our call to SetItemDefaultFocus() is processed)
    bool value_changed = false;
    for (int i = 0; i < items_count; i++)
    {
        PushID((void*)(intptr_t)i);
        bool const item_selected = (i == *current_item);
        char const* item_text;
        if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
            item_text = "*Unknown item*";
        if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected))
        {
            value_changed = true;
            *current_item = i;
        }
        if (item_selected)
            SetItemDefaultFocus();
        PopID();
    }

    EndCombo();
    return value_changed;
}

// Combo box helper allowing to pass an array of strings.
bool ImGui::Combo(char const* label, int* current_item, char const* const items[], int items_count, int height_in_items)
{
    bool const value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void*)items, items_count, height_in_items);
    return value_changed;
}

// Combo box helper allowing to pass all items in a single string literal holding multiple zero-terminated items "item1\0item2\0"
bool ImGui::Combo(char const* label, int* current_item, char const* items_separated_by_zeros, int height_in_items)
{
    int items_count = 0;
    char const* p = items_separated_by_zeros;       // FIXME-OPT: Avoid computing this, or at least only when combo is open
    while (*p)
    {
        p += strlen(p) + 1;
        items_count++;
    }
    bool value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_SingleStringGetter, (void*)items_separated_by_zeros, items_count, height_in_items);
    return value_changed;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Data Type and Data Formatting Helpers [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - PatchFormatStringFloatToInt()
// - DataTypeGetInfo()
// - DataTypeFormatString()
// - DataTypeApplyOp()
// - DataTypeApplyOpFromText()
// - GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision
// - RoundScalarWithFormat<>()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

static const ImGuiDataTypeInfo GDataTypeInfo[] =
{
    { sizeof(char),             "%d",   "%d"    },  // ImGuiDataType_S8
    { sizeof(unsigned char),    "%u",   "%u"    },
    { sizeof(short),            "%d",   "%d"    },  // ImGuiDataType_S16
    { sizeof(unsigned short),   "%u",   "%u"    },
    { sizeof(int),              "%d",   "%d"    },  // ImGuiDataType_S32
    { sizeof(unsigned int),     "%u",   "%u"    },
#ifdef _MSC_VER
    { sizeof(ImS64),            "%I64d","%I64d" },  // ImGuiDataType_S64
    { sizeof(ImU64),            "%I64u","%I64u" },
#else
    { sizeof(ImS64),            "%lld", "%lld"  },  // ImGuiDataType_S64
    { sizeof(ImU64),            "%llu", "%llu"  },
#endif
    { sizeof(float),            "%f",   "%f"    },  // ImGuiDataType_Float (float are promoted to double in va_arg)
    { sizeof(double),           "%f",   "%lf"   },  // ImGuiDataType_Double
};
IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(GDataTypeInfo) == ImGuiDataType_COUNT);

// FIXME-LEGACY: Prior to 1.61 our DragInt() function internally used floats and because of this the compile-time default value for format was "%.0f".
// Even though we changed the compile-time default, we expect users to have carried %f around, which would break the display of DragInt() calls.
// To honor backward compatibility we are rewriting the format string, unless IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS is enabled. What could possibly go wrong?!
static char const* PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(char const* fmt)
{
    if (fmt[0] == '%' && fmt[1] == '.' && fmt[2] == '0' && fmt[3] == 'f' && fmt[4] == 0) // Fast legacy path for "%.0f" which is expected to be the most common case.
        return "%d";
    char const* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);    // Find % (if any, and ignore %%)
    char const* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_start);  // Find end of format specifier, which itself is an exercise of confidence/recklessness (because snprintf is dependent on libc or user).
    if (fmt_end > fmt_start && fmt_end[-1] == 'f')
    {
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
        if (fmt_start == fmt && fmt_end[0] == 0)
            return "%d";
        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
        ImFormatString(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), "%.*s%%d%s", (int)(fmt_start - fmt), fmt, fmt_end); // Honor leading and trailing decorations, but lose alignment/precision.
        return g.TempBuffer;
#else
        IM_ASSERT(0 && "DragInt(): Invalid format string!"); // Old versions used a default parameter of "%.0f", please replace with e.g. "%d"
#endif
    }
    return fmt;
}

const ImGuiDataTypeInfo* ImGui::DataTypeGetInfo(ImGuiDataType data_type)
{
    IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
    return &GDataTypeInfo[data_type];
}

int ImGui::DataTypeFormatString(char* buf, int buf_size, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* p_data, char const* format)
{
    // Signedness doesn't matter when pushing integer arguments
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U32)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU32*)p_data);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S64 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U64)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU64*)p_data);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(float const*)p_data);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(double const*)p_data);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S8)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImS8*)p_data);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U8)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU8*)p_data);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S16)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImS16*)p_data);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U16)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU16*)p_data);
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return 0;
}

void ImGui::DataTypeApplyOp(ImGuiDataType data_type, int op, void* output, void* arg1, const void* arg2)
{
    IM_ASSERT(op == '+' || op == '-');
    switch (data_type)
    {
        case ImGuiDataType_S8:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImS8*)output  = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS8*)arg1,  *(const ImS8*)arg2,  IM_S8_MIN,  IM_S8_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImS8*)output  = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS8*)arg1,  *(const ImS8*)arg2,  IM_S8_MIN,  IM_S8_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_U8:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImU8*)output  = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU8*)arg1,  *(const ImU8*)arg2,  IM_U8_MIN,  IM_U8_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImU8*)output  = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU8*)arg1,  *(const ImU8*)arg2,  IM_U8_MIN,  IM_U8_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_S16:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImS16*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS16*)arg1, *(const ImS16*)arg2, IM_S16_MIN, IM_S16_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImS16*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS16*)arg1, *(const ImS16*)arg2, IM_S16_MIN, IM_S16_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_U16:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImU16*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU16*)arg1, *(const ImU16*)arg2, IM_U16_MIN, IM_U16_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImU16*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU16*)arg1, *(const ImU16*)arg2, IM_U16_MIN, IM_U16_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_S32:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImS32*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS32*)arg1, *(const ImS32*)arg2, IM_S32_MIN, IM_S32_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImS32*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS32*)arg1, *(const ImS32*)arg2, IM_S32_MIN, IM_S32_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_U32:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImU32*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU32*)arg1, *(const ImU32*)arg2, IM_U32_MIN, IM_U32_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImU32*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU32*)arg1, *(const ImU32*)arg2, IM_U32_MIN, IM_U32_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_S64:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImS64*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS64*)arg1, *(const ImS64*)arg2, IM_S64_MIN, IM_S64_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImS64*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS64*)arg1, *(const ImS64*)arg2, IM_S64_MIN, IM_S64_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_U64:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImU64*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU64*)arg1, *(const ImU64*)arg2, IM_U64_MIN, IM_U64_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImU64*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU64*)arg1, *(const ImU64*)arg2, IM_U64_MIN, IM_U64_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_Float:
            if (op == '+') { *(float*)output = *(float const*)arg1 + *(float const*)arg2; }
            if (op == '-') { *(float*)output = *(float const*)arg1 - *(float const*)arg2; }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_Double:
            if (op == '+') { *(double*)output = *(double const*)arg1 + *(double const*)arg2; }
            if (op == '-') { *(double*)output = *(double const*)arg1 - *(double const*)arg2; }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
}

// User can input math operators (e.g. +100) to edit a numerical values.
// NB: This is _not_ a full expression evaluator. We should probably add one and replace this dumb mess..
bool ImGui::DataTypeApplyOpFromText(char const* buf, char const* initial_value_buf, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, char const* format)
{
    while (ImCharIsBlankA(*buf))
        buf++;

    // We don't support '-' op because it would conflict with inputing negative value.
    // Instead you can use +-100 to subtract from an existing value
    char op = buf[0];
    if (op == '+' || op == '*' || op == '/')
    {
        buf++;
        while (ImCharIsBlankA(*buf))
            buf++;
    }
    else
    {
        op = 0;
    }
    if (!buf[0])
        return false;

    // Copy the value in an opaque buffer so we can compare at the end of the function if it changed at all.
    IM_ASSERT(data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
    int data_backup[2];
    const ImGuiDataTypeInfo* type_info = ImGui::DataTypeGetInfo(data_type);
    IM_ASSERT(type_info->Size <= sizeof(data_backup));
    memcpy(data_backup, p_data, type_info->Size);

    if (format == NULL)
        format = type_info->ScanFmt;

    // FIXME-LEGACY: The aim is to remove those operators and write a proper expression evaluator at some point..
    int arg1i = 0;
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32)
    {
        int* v = (int*)p_data;
        int arg0i = *v;
        float arg1f = 0.0f;
        if (op && sscanf(initial_value_buf, format, &arg0i) < 1)
            return false;
        // Store operand in a float so we can use fractional value for multipliers (*1.1), but constant always parsed as integer so we can fit big integers (e.g. 2000000003) past float precision
        if (op == '+')      { if (sscanf(buf, "%d", &arg1i)) *v = (int)(arg0i + arg1i); }                   // Add (use "+-" to subtract)
        else if (op == '*') { if (sscanf(buf, "%f", &arg1f)) *v = (int)(arg0i * arg1f); }                   // Multiply
        else if (op == '/') { if (sscanf(buf, "%f", &arg1f) && arg1f != 0.0f) *v = (int)(arg0i / arg1f); }  // Divide
        else                { if (sscanf(buf, format, &arg1i) == 1) *v = arg1i; }                           // Assign constant
    }
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float)
    {
        // For floats we have to ignore format with precision (e.g. "%.2f") because sscanf doesn't take them in
        format = "%f";
        float* v = (float*)p_data;
        float arg0f = *v, arg1f = 0.0f;
        if (op && sscanf(initial_value_buf, format, &arg0f) < 1)
            return false;
        if (sscanf(buf, format, &arg1f) < 1)
            return false;
        if (op == '+')      { *v = arg0f + arg1f; }                    // Add (use "+-" to subtract)
        else if (op == '*') { *v = arg0f * arg1f; }                    // Multiply
        else if (op == '/') { if (arg1f != 0.0f) *v = arg0f / arg1f; } // Divide
        else                { *v = arg1f; }                            // Assign constant
    }
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
    {
        format = "%lf"; // scanf differentiate float/double unlike printf which forces everything to double because of ellipsis
        double* v = (double*)p_data;
        double arg0f = *v, arg1f = 0.0;
        if (op && sscanf(initial_value_buf, format, &arg0f) < 1)
            return false;
        if (sscanf(buf, format, &arg1f) < 1)
            return false;
        if (op == '+')      { *v = arg0f + arg1f; }                    // Add (use "+-" to subtract)
        else if (op == '*') { *v = arg0f * arg1f; }                    // Multiply
        else if (op == '/') { if (arg1f != 0.0f) *v = arg0f / arg1f; } // Divide
        else                { *v = arg1f; }                            // Assign constant
    }
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U32 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_S64 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U64)
    {
        // All other types assign constant
        // We don't bother handling support for legacy operators since they are a little too crappy. Instead we will later implement a proper expression evaluator in the future.
        sscanf(buf, format, p_data);
    }
    else
    {
        // Small types need a 32-bit buffer to receive the result from scanf()
        int v32;
        sscanf(buf, format, &v32);
        if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S8)
            *(ImS8*)p_data = (ImS8)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_S8_MIN, (int)IM_S8_MAX);
        else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U8)
            *(ImU8*)p_data = (ImU8)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_U8_MIN, (int)IM_U8_MAX);
        else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S16)
            *(ImS16*)p_data = (ImS16)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_S16_MIN, (int)IM_S16_MAX);
        else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U16)
            *(ImU16*)p_data = (ImU16)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_U16_MIN, (int)IM_U16_MAX);
        else
            IM_ASSERT(0);
    }

    return memcmp(data_backup, p_data, type_info->Size) != 0;
}

static float GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(int decimal_precision)
{
    static float const min_steps[10] = { 1.0f, 0.1f, 0.01f, 0.001f, 0.0001f, 0.00001f, 0.000001f, 0.0000001f, 0.00000001f, 0.000000001f };
    if (decimal_precision < 0)
        return FLT_MIN;
    return (decimal_precision < IM_ARRAYSIZE(min_steps)) ? min_steps[decimal_precision] : ImPow(10.0f, (float)-decimal_precision);
}

template<typename TYPE>
static char const* ImAtoi(char const* src, TYPE* output)
{
    int negative = 0;
    if (*src == '-') { negative = 1; src++; }
    if (*src == '+') { src++; }
    TYPE v = 0;
    while (*src >= '0' && *src <= '9')
        v = (v * 10) + (*src++ - '0');
    *output = negative ? -v : v;
    return src;
}

template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE>
TYPE ImGui::RoundScalarWithFormatT(char const* format, ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE v)
{
    char const* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(format);
    if (fmt_start[0] != '%' || fmt_start[1] == '%') // Don't apply if the value is not visible in the format string
        return v;
    char v_str[64];
    ImFormatString(v_str, IM_ARRAYSIZE(v_str), fmt_start, v);
    char const* p = v_str;
    while (*p == ' ')
        p++;
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
        v = (TYPE)ImAtof(p);
    else
        ImAtoi(p, (SIGNEDTYPE*)&v);
    return v;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: DragScalar, DragFloat, DragInt, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - DragBehaviorT<>() [Internal]
// - DragBehavior() [Internal]
// - DragScalar()
// - DragScalarN()
// - DragFloat()
// - DragFloat2()
// - DragFloat3()
// - DragFloat4()
// - DragFloatRange2()
// - DragInt()
// - DragInt2()
// - DragInt3()
// - DragInt4()
// - DragIntRange2()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// This is called by DragBehavior() when the widget is active (held by mouse or being manipulated with Nav controls)
template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
bool ImGui::DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, float v_speed, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, char const* format, float power, ImGuiDragFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiAxis axis = (flags & ImGuiDragFlags_Vertical) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X;
    bool const is_decimal = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
    bool const is_clamped = (v_min < v_max);
    bool const is_power = (power != 1.0f && is_decimal && is_clamped && (v_max - v_min < FLT_MAX));
    bool const is_locked = (v_min > v_max);
    if (is_locked)
        return false;

    // Default tweak speed
    if (v_speed == 0.0f && is_clamped && (v_max - v_min < FLT_MAX))
        v_speed = (float)((v_max - v_min) * g.DragSpeedDefaultRatio);

    // Inputs accumulates into g.DragCurrentAccum, which is flushed into the current value as soon as it makes a difference with our precision settings
    float adjust_delta = 0.0f;
    if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && IsMousePosValid() && g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[0] > 1.0f*1.0f)
    {
        adjust_delta = g.IO.MouseDelta[axis];
        if (g.IO.KeyAlt)
            adjust_delta *= 1.0f / 100.0f;
        if (g.IO.KeyShift)
            adjust_delta *= 10.0f;
    }
    else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
    {
        int decimal_precision = is_decimal ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0;
        adjust_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard | ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatFast, 1.0f / 10.0f, 10.0f)[axis];
        v_speed = ImMax(v_speed, GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(decimal_precision));
    }
    adjust_delta *= v_speed;

    // For vertical drag we currently assume that Up=higher value (like we do with vertical sliders). This may become a parameter.
    if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
        adjust_delta = -adjust_delta;

    // Clear current value on activation
    // Avoid altering values and clamping when we are _already_ past the limits and heading in the same direction, so e.g. if range is 0..255, current value is 300 and we are pushing to the right side, keep the 300.
    bool is_just_activated = g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated;
    bool is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward = is_clamped && ((*v >= v_max && adjust_delta > 0.0f) || (*v <= v_min && adjust_delta < 0.0f));
    bool is_drag_direction_change_with_power = is_power && ((adjust_delta < 0 && g.DragCurrentAccum > 0) || (adjust_delta > 0 && g.DragCurrentAccum < 0));
    if (is_just_activated || is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward || is_drag_direction_change_with_power)
    {
        g.DragCurrentAccum = 0.0f;
        g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false;
    }
    else if (adjust_delta != 0.0f)
    {
        g.DragCurrentAccum += adjust_delta;
        g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = true;
    }

    if (!g.DragCurrentAccumDirty)
        return false;

    TYPE v_cur = *v;
    FLOATTYPE v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = (FLOATTYPE)0.0f;

    if (is_power)
    {
        // Offset + round to user desired precision, with a curve on the v_min..v_max range to get more precision on one side of the range
        FLOATTYPE v_old_norm_curved = ImPow((FLOATTYPE)(v_cur - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(v_max - v_min), (FLOATTYPE)1.0f / power);
        FLOATTYPE v_new_norm_curved = v_old_norm_curved + (g.DragCurrentAccum / (v_max - v_min));
        v_cur = v_min + (SIGNEDTYPE)ImPow(ImSaturate((float)v_new_norm_curved), power) * (v_max - v_min);
        v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = v_old_norm_curved;
    }
    else
    {
        v_cur += (SIGNEDTYPE)g.DragCurrentAccum;
    }

    // Round to user desired precision based on format string
    v_cur = RoundScalarWithFormatT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE>(format, data_type, v_cur);

    // Preserve remainder after rounding has been applied. This also allow slow tweaking of values.
    g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false;
    if (is_power)
    {
        FLOATTYPE v_cur_norm_curved = ImPow((FLOATTYPE)(v_cur - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(v_max - v_min), (FLOATTYPE)1.0f / power);
        g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)(v_cur_norm_curved - v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder);
    }
    else
    {
        g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)((SIGNEDTYPE)v_cur - (SIGNEDTYPE)*v);
    }

    // Lose zero sign for float/double
    if (v_cur == (TYPE)-0)
        v_cur = (TYPE)0;

    // Clamp values (+ handle overflow/wrap-around for integer types)
    if (*v != v_cur && is_clamped)
    {
        if (v_cur < v_min || (v_cur > *v && adjust_delta < 0.0f && !is_decimal))
            v_cur = v_min;
        if (v_cur > v_max || (v_cur < *v && adjust_delta > 0.0f && !is_decimal))
            v_cur = v_max;
    }

    // Apply result
    if (*v == v_cur)
        return false;
    *v = v_cur;
    return true;
}

bool ImGui::DragBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_v, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, char const* format, float power, ImGuiDragFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.ActiveId == id)
    {
        if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && !g.IO.MouseDown[0])
            ClearActiveID();
        else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav && g.NavActivatePressedId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
            ClearActiveID();
    }
    if (g.ActiveId != id)
        return false;

    switch (data_type)
    {
    case ImGuiDataType_S8:     { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS8*)p_v;  bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float>(ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImS8*) p_min : IM_S8_MIN,  p_max ? *(const ImS8*)p_max  : IM_S8_MAX,  format, power, flags); if (r) *(ImS8*)p_v = (ImS8)v32; return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_U8:     { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU8*)p_v;  bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float>(ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImU8*) p_min : IM_U8_MIN,  p_max ? *(const ImU8*)p_max  : IM_U8_MAX,  format, power, flags); if (r) *(ImU8*)p_v = (ImU8)v32; return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_S16:    { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS16*)p_v; bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float>(ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImS16*)p_min : IM_S16_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImS16*)p_max : IM_S16_MAX, format, power, flags); if (r) *(ImS16*)p_v = (ImS16)v32; return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_U16:    { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU16*)p_v; bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float>(ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImU16*)p_min : IM_U16_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImU16*)p_max : IM_U16_MAX, format, power, flags); if (r) *(ImU16*)p_v = (ImU16)v32; return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_S32:    return DragBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(data_type, (ImS32*)p_v,  v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImS32* )p_min : IM_S32_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImS32* )p_max : IM_S32_MAX, format, power, flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_U32:    return DragBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(data_type, (ImU32*)p_v,  v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImU32* )p_min : IM_U32_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImU32* )p_max : IM_U32_MAX, format, power, flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_S64:    return DragBehaviorT<ImS64, ImS64, double>(data_type, (ImS64*)p_v,  v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImS64* )p_min : IM_S64_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImS64* )p_max : IM_S64_MAX, format, power, flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_U64:    return DragBehaviorT<ImU64, ImS64, double>(data_type, (ImU64*)p_v,  v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImU64* )p_min : IM_U64_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImU64* )p_max : IM_U64_MAX, format, power, flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_Float:  return DragBehaviorT<float, float, float >(data_type, (float*)p_v,  v_speed, p_min ? *(float const* )p_min : -FLT_MAX,   p_max ? *(float const* )p_max : FLT_MAX,    format, power, flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_Double: return DragBehaviorT<double,double,double>(data_type, (double*)p_v, v_speed, p_min ? *(double const*)p_min : -DBL_MAX,   p_max ? *(double const*)p_max : DBL_MAX,    format, power, flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_COUNT:  break;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return false;
}

// Note: p_data, p_min and p_max are _pointers_ to a memory address holding the data. For a Drag widget, p_min and p_max are optional.
// Read code of e.g. SliderFloat(), SliderInt() etc. or examples in 'Demo->Widgets->Data Types' to understand how to use this function directly.
bool ImGui::DragScalar(char const* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, char const* format, float power)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    if (power != 1.0f)
        IM_ASSERT(p_min != NULL && p_max != NULL); // When using a power curve the drag needs to have known bounds

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    float const w = CalcItemWidth();
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));

    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
        return false;

    // Default format string when passing NULL
    if (format == NULL)
        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0) // (FIXME-LEGACY: Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function more details.)
        format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);

    // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Drag turns it into an input box
    bool const hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
    bool temp_input_is_active = TempInputTextIsActive(id);
    bool temp_input_start = false;
    if (!temp_input_is_active)
    {
        bool const focus_requested = FocusableItemRegister(window, id);
        bool const clicked = (hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]);
        bool const double_clicked = (hovered && g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0]);
        if (focus_requested || clicked || double_clicked || g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavInputId == id)
        {
            SetActiveID(id, window);
            SetFocusID(id, window);
            FocusWindow(window);
            g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask = (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right);
            if (focus_requested || (clicked && g.IO.KeyCtrl) || double_clicked || g.NavInputId == id)
            {
                temp_input_start = true;
                FocusableItemUnregister(window);
            }
        }
    }
    if (temp_input_is_active || temp_input_start)
        return TempInputTextScalar(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, p_data, format);

    // Draw frame
    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : g.HoveredId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, style.FrameRounding);

    // Drag behavior
    bool const value_changed = DragBehavior(id, data_type, p_data, v_speed, p_min, p_max, format, power, ImGuiDragFlags_None);
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
    char value_buf[64];
    char const* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, p_data, format);
    RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));

    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags);
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::DragScalarN(char const* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, char const* format, float power)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    bool value_changed = false;
    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);
    PushMultiItemsWidths(components, CalcItemWidth());
    size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
    for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
    {
        PushID(i);
        if (i > 0)
            SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        value_changed |= DragScalar("", data_type, p_data, v_speed, p_min, p_max, format, power);
        PopID();
        PopItemWidth();
        p_data = (void*)((char*)p_data + type_size);
    }
    PopID();

    char const* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    if (label != label_end)
    {
        SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        TextEx(label, label_end);
    }

    EndGroup();
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat(char const* label, float* v, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, char const* format, float power)
{
    return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat2(char const* label, float v[2], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, char const* format, float power)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat3(char const* label, float v[3], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, char const* format, float power)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat4(char const* label, float v[4], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, char const* format, float power)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::DragFloatRange2(char const* label, float* v_current_min, float* v_current_max, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, char const* format, char const* format_max, float power)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    PushID(label);
    BeginGroup();
    PushMultiItemsWidths(2, CalcItemWidth());

    bool value_changed = DragFloat("##min", v_current_min, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? -FLT_MAX : v_min, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max), format, power);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
    value_changed |= DragFloat("##max", v_current_max, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min), (v_min >= v_max) ? FLT_MAX : v_max, format_max ? format_max : format, power);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);

    TextEx(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
    EndGroup();
    PopID();
    return value_changed;
}

// NB: v_speed is float to allow adjusting the drag speed with more precision
bool ImGui::DragInt(char const* label, int* v, float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, char const* format)
{
    return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::DragInt2(char const* label, int v[2], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, char const* format)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::DragInt3(char const* label, int v[3], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, char const* format)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::DragInt4(char const* label, int v[4], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, char const* format)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::DragIntRange2(char const* label, int* v_current_min, int* v_current_max, float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, char const* format, char const* format_max)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    PushID(label);
    BeginGroup();
    PushMultiItemsWidths(2, CalcItemWidth());

    bool value_changed = DragInt("##min", v_current_min, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MIN : v_min, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max), format);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
    value_changed |= DragInt("##max", v_current_max, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min), (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MAX : v_max, format_max ? format_max : format);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);

    TextEx(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
    EndGroup();
    PopID();

    return value_changed;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: SliderScalar, SliderFloat, SliderInt, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - SliderBehaviorT<>() [Internal]
// - SliderBehavior() [Internal]
// - SliderScalar()
// - SliderScalarN()
// - SliderFloat()
// - SliderFloat2()
// - SliderFloat3()
// - SliderFloat4()
// - SliderAngle()
// - SliderInt()
// - SliderInt2()
// - SliderInt3()
// - SliderInt4()
// - VSliderScalar()
// - VSliderFloat()
// - VSliderInt()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

template<typename TYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
float ImGui::SliderCalcRatioFromValueT(ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE v, TYPE v_min, TYPE v_max, float power, float linear_zero_pos)
{
    if (v_min == v_max)
        return 0.0f;

    bool const is_power = (power != 1.0f) && (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
    const TYPE v_clamped = (v_min < v_max) ? ImClamp(v, v_min, v_max) : ImClamp(v, v_max, v_min);
    if (is_power)
    {
        if (v_clamped < 0.0f)
        {
            float const f = 1.0f - (float)((v_clamped - v_min) / (ImMin((TYPE)0, v_max) - v_min));
            return (1.0f - ImPow(f, 1.0f/power)) * linear_zero_pos;
        }
        else
        {
            float const f = (float)((v_clamped - ImMax((TYPE)0, v_min)) / (v_max - ImMax((TYPE)0, v_min)));
            return linear_zero_pos + ImPow(f, 1.0f/power) * (1.0f - linear_zero_pos);
        }
    }

    // Linear slider
    return (float)((FLOATTYPE)(v_clamped - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(v_max - v_min));
}

// FIXME: Move some of the code into SliderBehavior(). Current responsability is larger than what the equivalent DragBehaviorT<> does, we also do some rendering, etc.
template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
bool ImGui::SliderBehaviorT(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, char const* format, float power, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    const ImGuiAxis axis = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X;
    bool const is_decimal = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
    bool const is_power = (power != 1.0f) && is_decimal;

    float const grab_padding = 2.0f;
    float const slider_sz = (bb.Max[axis] - bb.Min[axis]) - grab_padding * 2.0f;
    float grab_sz = style.GrabMinSize;
    SIGNEDTYPE v_range = (v_min < v_max ? v_max - v_min : v_min - v_max);
    if (!is_decimal && v_range >= 0)                                             // v_range < 0 may happen on integer overflows
        grab_sz = ImMax((float)(slider_sz / (v_range + 1)), style.GrabMinSize);  // For integer sliders: if possible have the grab size represent 1 unit
    grab_sz = ImMin(grab_sz, slider_sz);
    float const slider_usable_sz = slider_sz - grab_sz;
    float const slider_usable_pos_min = bb.Min[axis] + grab_padding + grab_sz * 0.5f;
    float const slider_usable_pos_max = bb.Max[axis] - grab_padding - grab_sz * 0.5f;

    // For power curve sliders that cross over sign boundary we want the curve to be symmetric around 0.0f
    float linear_zero_pos;   // 0.0->1.0f
    if (is_power && v_min * v_max < 0.0f)
    {
        // Different sign
        const FLOATTYPE linear_dist_min_to_0 = ImPow(v_min >= 0 ? (FLOATTYPE)v_min : -(FLOATTYPE)v_min, (FLOATTYPE)1.0f / power);
        const FLOATTYPE linear_dist_max_to_0 = ImPow(v_max >= 0 ? (FLOATTYPE)v_max : -(FLOATTYPE)v_max, (FLOATTYPE)1.0f / power);
        linear_zero_pos = (float)(linear_dist_min_to_0 / (linear_dist_min_to_0 + linear_dist_max_to_0));
    }
    else
    {
        // Same sign
        linear_zero_pos = v_min < 0.0f ? 1.0f : 0.0f;
    }

    // Process interacting with the slider
    bool value_changed = false;
    if (g.ActiveId == id)
    {
        bool set_new_value = false;
        float clicked_t = 0.0f;
        if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse)
        {
            if (!g.IO.MouseDown[0])
            {
                ClearActiveID();
            }
            else
            {
                float const mouse_abs_pos = g.IO.MousePos[axis];
                clicked_t = (slider_usable_sz > 0.0f) ? ImClamp((mouse_abs_pos - slider_usable_pos_min) / slider_usable_sz, 0.0f, 1.0f) : 0.0f;
                if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
                    clicked_t = 1.0f - clicked_t;
                set_new_value = true;
            }
        }
        else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
        {
            const ImVec2 delta2 = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard | ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatFast, 0.0f, 0.0f);
            float delta = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? delta2.x : -delta2.y;
            if (g.NavActivatePressedId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
            {
                ClearActiveID();
            }
            else if (delta != 0.0f)
            {
                clicked_t = SliderCalcRatioFromValueT<TYPE,FLOATTYPE>(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, power, linear_zero_pos);
                int const decimal_precision = is_decimal ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0;
                if ((decimal_precision > 0) || is_power)
                {
                    delta /= 100.0f;    // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in % of slider bounds
                    if (IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow))
                        delta /= 10.0f;
                }
                else
                {
                    if ((v_range >= -100.0f && v_range <= 100.0f) || IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow))
                        delta = ((delta < 0.0f) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) / (float)v_range; // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in integer steps
                    else
                        delta /= 100.0f;
                }
                if (IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast))
                    delta *= 10.0f;
                set_new_value = true;
                if ((clicked_t >= 1.0f && delta > 0.0f) || (clicked_t <= 0.0f && delta < 0.0f)) // This is to avoid applying the saturation when already past the limits
                    set_new_value = false;
                else
                    clicked_t = ImSaturate(clicked_t + delta);
            }
        }

        if (set_new_value)
        {
            TYPE v_new;
            if (is_power)
            {
                // Account for power curve scale on both sides of the zero
                if (clicked_t < linear_zero_pos)
                {
                    // Negative: rescale to the negative range before powering
                    float a = 1.0f - (clicked_t / linear_zero_pos);
                    a = ImPow(a, power);
                    v_new = ImLerp(ImMin(v_max, (TYPE)0), v_min, a);
                }
                else
                {
                    // Positive: rescale to the positive range before powering
                    float a;
                    if (ImFabs(linear_zero_pos - 1.0f) > 1.e-6f)
                        a = (clicked_t - linear_zero_pos) / (1.0f - linear_zero_pos);
                    else
                        a = clicked_t;
                    a = ImPow(a, power);
                    v_new = ImLerp(ImMax(v_min, (TYPE)0), v_max, a);
                }
            }
            else
            {
                // Linear slider
                if (is_decimal)
                {
                    v_new = ImLerp(v_min, v_max, clicked_t);
                }
                else
                {
                    // For integer values we want the clicking position to match the grab box so we round above
                    // This code is carefully tuned to work with large values (e.g. high ranges of U64) while preserving this property..
                    FLOATTYPE v_new_off_f = (v_max - v_min) * clicked_t;
                    TYPE v_new_off_floor = (TYPE)(v_new_off_f);
                    TYPE v_new_off_round = (TYPE)(v_new_off_f + (FLOATTYPE)0.5);
                    if (v_new_off_floor < v_new_off_round)
                        v_new = v_min + v_new_off_round;
                    else
                        v_new = v_min + v_new_off_floor;
                }
            }

            // Round to user desired precision based on format string
            v_new = RoundScalarWithFormatT<TYPE,SIGNEDTYPE>(format, data_type, v_new);

            // Apply result
            if (*v != v_new)
            {
                *v = v_new;
                value_changed = true;
            }
        }
    }

    if (slider_sz < 1.0f)
    {
        *out_grab_bb = ImRect(bb.Min, bb.Min);
    }
    else
    {
        // Output grab position so it can be displayed by the caller
        float grab_t = SliderCalcRatioFromValueT<TYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, power, linear_zero_pos);
        if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
            grab_t = 1.0f - grab_t;
        float const grab_pos = ImLerp(slider_usable_pos_min, slider_usable_pos_max, grab_t);
        if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X)
            *out_grab_bb = ImRect(grab_pos - grab_sz * 0.5f, bb.Min.y + grab_padding, grab_pos + grab_sz * 0.5f, bb.Max.y - grab_padding);
        else
            *out_grab_bb = ImRect(bb.Min.x + grab_padding, grab_pos - grab_sz * 0.5f, bb.Max.x - grab_padding, grab_pos + grab_sz * 0.5f);
    }

    return value_changed;
}

// For 32-bit and larger types, slider bounds are limited to half the natural type range.
// So e.g. an integer Slider between INT_MAX-10 and INT_MAX will fail, but an integer Slider between INT_MAX/2-10 and INT_MAX/2 will be ok.
// It would be possible to lift that limitation with some work but it doesn't seem to be worth it for sliders.
bool ImGui::SliderBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_v, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, char const* format, float power, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb)
{
    switch (data_type)
    {
    case ImGuiDataType_S8:  { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS8*)p_v;  bool r = SliderBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float>(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, *(const ImS8*)p_min,  *(const ImS8*)p_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImS8*)p_v  = (ImS8)v32;  return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_U8:  { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU8*)p_v;  bool r = SliderBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float>(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, *(const ImU8*)p_min,  *(const ImU8*)p_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImU8*)p_v  = (ImU8)v32;  return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_S16: { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS16*)p_v; bool r = SliderBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float>(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, *(const ImS16*)p_min, *(const ImS16*)p_max, format, power, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImS16*)p_v = (ImS16)v32; return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_U16: { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU16*)p_v; bool r = SliderBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float>(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, *(const ImU16*)p_min, *(const ImU16*)p_max, format, power, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImU16*)p_v = (ImU16)v32; return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_S32:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS32*)p_min >= IM_S32_MIN/2 && *(const ImS32*)p_max <= IM_S32_MAX/2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, data_type, (ImS32*)p_v,  *(const ImS32*)p_min,  *(const ImS32*)p_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_U32:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU32*)p_max <= IM_U32_MAX/2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, data_type, (ImU32*)p_v,  *(const ImU32*)p_min,  *(const ImU32*)p_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_S64:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS64*)p_min >= IM_S64_MIN/2 && *(const ImS64*)p_max <= IM_S64_MAX/2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImS64, ImS64, double>(bb, id, data_type, (ImS64*)p_v,  *(const ImS64*)p_min,  *(const ImS64*)p_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_U64:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU64*)p_max <= IM_U64_MAX/2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImU64, ImS64, double>(bb, id, data_type, (ImU64*)p_v,  *(const ImU64*)p_min,  *(const ImU64*)p_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_Float:
        IM_ASSERT(*(float const*)p_min >= -FLT_MAX/2.0f && *(float const*)p_max <= FLT_MAX/2.0f);
        return SliderBehaviorT<float, float, float >(bb, id, data_type, (float*)p_v,  *(float const*)p_min,  *(float const*)p_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_Double:
        IM_ASSERT(*(double const*)p_min >= -DBL_MAX/2.0f && *(double const*)p_max <= DBL_MAX/2.0f);
        return SliderBehaviorT<double,double,double>(bb, id, data_type, (double*)p_v, *(double const*)p_min, *(double const*)p_max, format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return false;
}

// Note: p_data, p_min and p_max are _pointers_ to a memory address holding the data. For a slider, they are all required.
// Read code of e.g. SliderFloat(), SliderInt() etc. or examples in 'Demo->Widgets->Data Types' to understand how to use this function directly.
bool ImGui::SliderScalar(char const* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, char const* format, float power)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    float const w = CalcItemWidth();

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));

    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
        return false;

    // Default format string when passing NULL
    if (format == NULL)
        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0) // (FIXME-LEGACY: Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function more details.)
        format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);

    // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Slider turns it into an input box
    bool const hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
    bool temp_input_is_active = TempInputTextIsActive(id);
    bool temp_input_start = false;
    if (!temp_input_is_active)
    {
        bool const focus_requested = FocusableItemRegister(window, id);
        bool const clicked = (hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]);
        if (focus_requested || clicked || g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavInputId == id)
        {
            SetActiveID(id, window);
            SetFocusID(id, window);
            FocusWindow(window);
            g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right);
            if (focus_requested || (clicked && g.IO.KeyCtrl) || g.NavInputId == id)
            {
                temp_input_start = true;
                FocusableItemUnregister(window);
            }
        }
    }
    if (temp_input_is_active || temp_input_start)
        return TempInputTextScalar(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, p_data, format);

    // Draw frame
    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : g.HoveredId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);

    // Slider behavior
    ImRect grab_bb;
    bool const value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, p_data, p_min, p_max, format, power, ImGuiSliderFlags_None, &grab_bb);
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    // Render grab
    if (grab_bb.Max.x > grab_bb.Min.x)
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_bb.Min, grab_bb.Max, GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive : ImGuiCol_SliderGrab), style.GrabRounding);

    // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
    char value_buf[64];
    char const* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, p_data, format);
    RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f,0.5f));

    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags);
    return value_changed;
}

// Add multiple sliders on 1 line for compact edition of multiple components
bool ImGui::SliderScalarN(char const* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, char const* format, float power)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    bool value_changed = false;
    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);
    PushMultiItemsWidths(components, CalcItemWidth());
    size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
    for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
    {
        PushID(i);
        if (i > 0)
            SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        value_changed |= SliderScalar("", data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, power);
        PopID();
        PopItemWidth();
        v = (void*)((char*)v + type_size);
    }
    PopID();

    char const* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    if (label != label_end)
    {
        SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        TextEx(label, label_end);
    }

    EndGroup();
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat(char const* label, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, char const* format, float power)
{
    return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat2(char const* label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, char const* format, float power)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat3(char const* label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, char const* format, float power)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat4(char const* label, float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, char const* format, float power)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::SliderAngle(char const* label, float* v_rad, float v_degrees_min, float v_degrees_max, char const* format)
{
    if (format == NULL)
        format = "%.0f deg";
    float v_deg = (*v_rad) * 360.0f / (2*IM_PI);
    bool value_changed = SliderFloat(label, &v_deg, v_degrees_min, v_degrees_max, format, 1.0f);
    *v_rad = v_deg * (2*IM_PI) / 360.0f;
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt(char const* label, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, char const* format)
{
    return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt2(char const* label, int v[2], int v_min, int v_max, char const* format)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt3(char const* label, int v[3], int v_min, int v_max, char const* format)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt4(char const* label, int v[4], int v_min, int v_max, char const* format)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::VSliderScalar(char const* label, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, char const* format, float power)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    const ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));

    ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(frame_bb, id))
        return false;

    // Default format string when passing NULL
    if (format == NULL)
        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0) // (FIXME-LEGACY: Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function more details.)
        format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);

    bool const hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
    if ((hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]) || g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavInputId == id)
    {
        SetActiveID(id, window);
        SetFocusID(id, window);
        FocusWindow(window);
        g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
    }

    // Draw frame
    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : g.HoveredId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);

    // Slider behavior
    ImRect grab_bb;
    bool const value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, p_data, p_min, p_max, format, power, ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical, &grab_bb);
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    // Render grab
    if (grab_bb.Max.y > grab_bb.Min.y)
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_bb.Min, grab_bb.Max, GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive : ImGuiCol_SliderGrab), style.GrabRounding);

    // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
    // For the vertical slider we allow centered text to overlap the frame padding
    char value_buf[64];
    char const* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, p_data, format);
    RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f,0.0f));
    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::VSliderFloat(char const* label, const ImVec2& size, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, char const* format, float power)
{
    return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::VSliderInt(char const* label, const ImVec2& size, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, char const* format)
{
    return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: InputScalar, InputFloat, InputInt, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - ImParseFormatFindStart() [Internal]
// - ImParseFormatFindEnd() [Internal]
// - ImParseFormatTrimDecorations() [Internal]
// - ImParseFormatPrecision() [Internal]
// - TempInputTextScalar() [Internal]
// - InputScalar()
// - InputScalarN()
// - InputFloat()
// - InputFloat2()
// - InputFloat3()
// - InputFloat4()
// - InputInt()
// - InputInt2()
// - InputInt3()
// - InputInt4()
// - InputDouble()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// We don't use strchr() because our strings are usually very short and often start with '%'
char const* ImParseFormatFindStart(char const* fmt)
{
    while (char c = fmt[0])
    {
        if (c == '%' && fmt[1] != '%')
            return fmt;
        else if (c == '%')
            fmt++;
        fmt++;
    }
    return fmt;
}

char const* ImParseFormatFindEnd(char const* fmt)
{
    // Printf/scanf types modifiers: I/L/h/j/l/t/w/z. Other uppercase letters qualify as types aka end of the format.
    if (fmt[0] != '%')
        return fmt;
    unsigned int const ignored_uppercase_mask = (1 << ('I'-'A')) | (1 << ('L'-'A'));
    unsigned int const ignored_lowercase_mask = (1 << ('h'-'a')) | (1 << ('j'-'a')) | (1 << ('l'-'a')) | (1 << ('t'-'a')) | (1 << ('w'-'a')) | (1 << ('z'-'a'));
    for (char c; (c = *fmt) != 0; fmt++)
    {
        if (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z' && ((1 << (c - 'A')) & ignored_uppercase_mask) == 0)
            return fmt + 1;
        if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z' && ((1 << (c - 'a')) & ignored_lowercase_mask) == 0)
            return fmt + 1;
    }
    return fmt;
}

// Extract the format out of a format string with leading or trailing decorations
//  fmt = "blah blah"  -> return fmt
//  fmt = "%.3f"       -> return fmt
//  fmt = "hello %.3f" -> return fmt + 6
//  fmt = "%.3f hello" -> return buf written with "%.3f"
char const* ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(char const* fmt, char* buf, size_t buf_size)
{
    char const* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);
    if (fmt_start[0] != '%')
        return fmt;
    char const* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_start);
    if (fmt_end[0] == 0) // If we only have leading decoration, we don't need to copy the data.
        return fmt_start;
    ImStrncpy(buf, fmt_start, ImMin((size_t)(fmt_end - fmt_start) + 1, buf_size));
    return buf;
}

// Parse display precision back from the display format string
// FIXME: This is still used by some navigation code path to infer a minimum tweak step, but we should aim to rework widgets so it isn't needed.
int ImParseFormatPrecision(char const* fmt, int default_precision)
{
    fmt = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);
    if (fmt[0] != '%')
        return default_precision;
    fmt++;
    while (*fmt >= '0' && *fmt <= '9')
        fmt++;
    int precision = INT_MAX;
    if (*fmt == '.')
    {
        fmt = ImAtoi<int>(fmt + 1, &precision);
        if (precision < 0 || precision > 99)
            precision = default_precision;
    }
    if (*fmt == 'e' || *fmt == 'E') // Maximum precision with scientific notation
        precision = -1;
    if ((*fmt == 'g' || *fmt == 'G') && precision == INT_MAX)
        precision = -1;
    return (precision == INT_MAX) ? default_precision : precision;
}

// Create text input in place of another active widget (e.g. used when doing a CTRL+Click on drag/slider widgets)
// FIXME: Facilitate using this in variety of other situations.
bool ImGui::TempInputTextScalar(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, char const* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, char const* format)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    // On the first frame, g.TempInputTextId == 0, then on subsequent frames it becomes == id.
    // We clear ActiveID on the first frame to allow the InputText() taking it back.
    bool const init = (g.TempInputTextId != id);
    if (init)
        ClearActiveID();

    char fmt_buf[32];
    char data_buf[32];
    format = ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(format, fmt_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt_buf));
    DataTypeFormatString(data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), data_type, p_data, format);
    ImStrTrimBlanks(data_buf);

    g.CurrentWindow->DC.CursorPos = bb.Min;
    ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll | ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited;
    flags |= ((data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double) ? ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific : ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal);
    bool value_changed = InputTextEx(label, NULL, data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), bb.GetSize(), flags);
    if (init)
    {
        // First frame we started displaying the InputText widget, we expect it to take the active id.
        IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == id);
        g.TempInputTextId = g.ActiveId;
    }
    if (value_changed)
    {
        value_changed = DataTypeApplyOpFromText(data_buf, g.InputTextState.InitialTextA.Data, data_type, p_data, NULL);
        if (value_changed)
            MarkItemEdited(id);
    }
    return value_changed;
}

// Note: p_data, p_step, p_step_fast are _pointers_ to a memory address holding the data. For an Input widget, p_step and p_step_fast are optional.
// Read code of e.g. InputFloat(), InputInt() etc. or examples in 'Demo->Widgets->Data Types' to understand how to use this function directly.
bool ImGui::InputScalar(char const* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_step, const void* p_step_fast, char const* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    if (format == NULL)
        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;

    char buf[64];
    DataTypeFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), data_type, p_data, format);

    bool value_changed = false;
    if ((flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal;
    flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll;
    flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited;  // We call MarkItemEdited() ourselve by comparing the actual data rather than the string.

    if (p_step != NULL)
    {
        float const button_size = GetFrameHeight();

        BeginGroup(); // The only purpose of the group here is to allow the caller to query item data e.g. IsItemActive()
        PushID(label);
        SetNextItemWidth(ImMax(1.0f, CalcItemWidth() - (button_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * 2));
        if (InputText("", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), flags)) // PushId(label) + "" gives us the expected ID from outside point of view
            value_changed = DataTypeApplyOpFromText(buf, g.InputTextState.InitialTextA.Data, data_type, p_data, format);

        // Step buttons
        const ImVec2 backup_frame_padding = style.FramePadding;
        style.FramePadding.x = style.FramePadding.y;
        ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat | ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups;
        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly)
            button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Disabled;
        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        if (ButtonEx("-", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), button_flags))
        {
            DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '-', p_data, p_data, g.IO.KeyCtrl && p_step_fast ? p_step_fast : p_step);
            value_changed = true;
        }
        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        if (ButtonEx("+", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), button_flags))
        {
            DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '+', p_data, p_data, g.IO.KeyCtrl && p_step_fast ? p_step_fast : p_step);
            value_changed = true;
        }

        char const* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
        if (label != label_end)
        {
            SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
            TextEx(label, label_end);
        }
        style.FramePadding = backup_frame_padding;

        PopID();
        EndGroup();
    }
    else
    {
        if (InputText(label, buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), flags))
            value_changed = DataTypeApplyOpFromText(buf, g.InputTextState.InitialTextA.Data, data_type, p_data, format);
    }
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(window->DC.LastItemId);

    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::InputScalarN(char const* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, const void* p_step, const void* p_step_fast, char const* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    bool value_changed = false;
    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);
    PushMultiItemsWidths(components, CalcItemWidth());
    size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
    for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
    {
        PushID(i);
        if (i > 0)
            SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        value_changed |= InputScalar("", data_type, p_data, p_step, p_step_fast, format, flags);
        PopID();
        PopItemWidth();
        p_data = (void*)((char*)p_data + type_size);
    }
    PopID();

    char const* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    if (label != label_end)
    {
        SameLine(0.0f, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        TextEx(label, label_end);
    }

    EndGroup();
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat(char const* label, float* v, float step, float step_fast, char const* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
    return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, (void*)v, (void*)(step>0.0f ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast>0.0f ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat2(char const* label, float v[2], char const* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat3(char const* label, float v[3], char const* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat4(char const* label, float v[4], char const* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
}

// Prefer using "char const* format" directly, which is more flexible and consistent with other API.
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
bool ImGui::InputFloat(char const* label, float* v, float step, float step_fast, int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    char format[16] = "%f";
    if (decimal_precision >= 0)
        ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
    return InputFloat(label, v, step, step_fast, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat2(char const* label, float v[2], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    char format[16] = "%f";
    if (decimal_precision >= 0)
        ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat3(char const* label, float v[3], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    char format[16] = "%f";
    if (decimal_precision >= 0)
        ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat4(char const* label, float v[4], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    char format[16] = "%f";
    if (decimal_precision >= 0)
        ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
}
#endif // IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS

bool ImGui::InputInt(char const* label, int* v, int step, int step_fast, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    // Hexadecimal input provided as a convenience but the flag name is awkward. Typically you'd use InputText() to parse your own data, if you want to handle prefixes.
    char const* format = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal) ? "%08X" : "%d";
    return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, (void*)v, (void*)(step>0 ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast>0 ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputInt2(char const* label, int v[2], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputInt3(char const* label, int v[3], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputInt4(char const* label, int v[4], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputDouble(char const* label, double* v, double step, double step_fast, char const* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
    return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Double, (void*)v, (void*)(step>0.0 ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast>0.0 ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: InputText, InputTextMultiline, InputTextWithHint
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - InputText()
// - InputTextWithHint()
// - InputTextMultiline()
// - InputTextEx() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

bool ImGui::InputText(char const* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
{
    IM_ASSERT(!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // call InputTextMultiline()
    return InputTextEx(label, NULL, buf, (int)buf_size, ImVec2(0,0), flags, callback, user_data);
}

bool ImGui::InputTextMultiline(char const* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
{
    return InputTextEx(label, NULL, buf, (int)buf_size, size, flags | ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline, callback, user_data);
}

bool ImGui::InputTextWithHint(char const* label, char const* hint, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
{
    IM_ASSERT(!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // call InputTextMultiline()
    return InputTextEx(label, hint, buf, (int)buf_size, ImVec2(0, 0), flags, callback, user_data);
}

static int InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(char const* text_begin, char const** out_text_end)
{
    int line_count = 0;
    char const* s = text_begin;
    while (char c = *s++) // We are only matching for \n so we can ignore UTF-8 decoding
        if (c == '\n')
            line_count++;
    s--;
    if (s[0] != '\n' && s[0] != '\r')
        line_count++;
    *out_text_end = s;
    return line_count;
}

static ImVec2 InputTextCalcTextSizeW(const ImWchar* text_begin, const ImWchar* text_end, const ImWchar** remaining, ImVec2* out_offset, bool stop_on_new_line)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImFont* font = g.Font;
    float const line_height = g.FontSize;
    float const scale = line_height / font->FontSize;

    ImVec2 text_size = ImVec2(0,0);
    float line_width = 0.0f;

    const ImWchar* s = text_begin;
    while (s < text_end)
    {
        unsigned int c = (unsigned int)(*s++);
        if (c == '\n')
        {
            text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, line_width);
            text_size.y += line_height;
            line_width = 0.0f;
            if (stop_on_new_line)
                break;
            continue;
        }
        if (c == '\r')
            continue;

        float const char_width = font->GetCharAdvance((ImWchar)c) * scale;
        line_width += char_width;
    }

    if (text_size.x < line_width)
        text_size.x = line_width;

    if (out_offset)
        *out_offset = ImVec2(line_width, text_size.y + line_height);  // offset allow for the possibility of sitting after a trailing \n

    if (line_width > 0 || text_size.y == 0.0f)                        // whereas size.y will ignore the trailing \n
        text_size.y += line_height;

    if (remaining)
        *remaining = s;

    return text_size;
}

// Wrapper for stb_textedit.h to edit text (our wrapper is for: statically sized buffer, single-line, wchar characters. InputText converts between UTF-8 and wchar)
namespace ImStb
{

static int     STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(const STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj)                             { return obj->CurLenW; }
static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(const STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)                      { return obj->TextW[idx]; }
static float   STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int line_start_idx, int char_idx)  { ImWchar c = obj->TextW[line_start_idx + char_idx]; if (c == '\n') return STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE; ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.Font->GetCharAdvance(c) * (g.FontSize / g.Font->FontSize); }
static int     STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(int key)                                                    { return key >= 0x200000 ? 0 : key; }
static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE = '\n';
static void    STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(StbTexteditRow* r, STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int line_start_idx)
{
    const ImWchar* text = obj->TextW.Data;
    const ImWchar* text_remaining = NULL;
    const ImVec2 size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(text + line_start_idx, text + obj->CurLenW, &text_remaining, NULL, true);
    r->x0 = 0.0f;
    r->x1 = size.x;
    r->baseline_y_delta = size.y;
    r->ymin = 0.0f;
    r->ymax = size.y;
    r->num_chars = (int)(text_remaining - (text + line_start_idx));
}

static bool is_separator(unsigned int c)                                        { return ImCharIsBlankW(c) || c==',' || c==';' || c=='(' || c==')' || c=='{' || c=='}' || c=='[' || c==']' || c=='|'; }
static int  is_word_boundary_from_right(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)      { return idx > 0 ? (is_separator( obj->TextW[idx-1] ) && !is_separator( obj->TextW[idx] ) ) : 1; }
static int  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)   { idx--; while (idx >= 0 && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx)) idx--; return idx < 0 ? 0 : idx; }
#ifdef __APPLE__    // FIXME: Move setting to IO structure
static int  is_word_boundary_from_left(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)       { return idx > 0 ? (!is_separator( obj->TextW[idx-1] ) && is_separator( obj->TextW[idx] ) ) : 1; }
static int  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)  { idx++; int len = obj->CurLenW; while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_left(obj, idx)) idx++; return idx > len ? len : idx; }
#else
static int  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)  { idx++; int len = obj->CurLenW; while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx)) idx++; return idx > len ? len : idx; }
#endif
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT   STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL    // They need to be #define for stb_textedit.h
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL

static void STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int pos, int n)
{
    ImWchar* dst = obj->TextW.Data + pos;

    // We maintain our buffer length in both UTF-8 and wchar formats
    obj->CurLenA -= ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(dst, dst + n);
    obj->CurLenW -= n;

    // Offset remaining text (FIXME-OPT: Use memmove)
    const ImWchar* src = obj->TextW.Data + pos + n;
    while (ImWchar c = *src++)
        *dst++ = c;
    *dst = '\0';
}

static bool STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int pos, const ImWchar* new_text, int new_text_len)
{
    bool const is_resizable = (obj->UserFlags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
    int const text_len = obj->CurLenW;
    IM_ASSERT(pos <= text_len);

    int const new_text_len_utf8 = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(new_text, new_text + new_text_len);
    if (!is_resizable && (new_text_len_utf8 + obj->CurLenA + 1 > obj->BufCapacityA))
        return false;

    // Grow internal buffer if needed
    if (new_text_len + text_len + 1 > obj->TextW.Size)
    {
        if (!is_resizable)
            return false;
        IM_ASSERT(text_len < obj->TextW.Size);
        obj->TextW.resize(text_len + ImClamp(new_text_len * 4, 32, ImMax(256, new_text_len)) + 1);
    }

    ImWchar* text = obj->TextW.Data;
    if (pos != text_len)
        memmove(text + pos + new_text_len, text + pos, (size_t)(text_len - pos) * sizeof(ImWchar));
    memcpy(text + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(ImWchar));

    obj->CurLenW += new_text_len;
    obj->CurLenA += new_text_len_utf8;
    obj->TextW[obj->CurLenW] = '\0';

    return true;
}

// We don't use an enum so we can build even with conflicting symbols (if another user of stb_textedit.h leak their STB_TEXTEDIT_K_* symbols)
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT         0x200000 // keyboard input to move cursor left
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT        0x200001 // keyboard input to move cursor right
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP           0x200002 // keyboard input to move cursor up
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN         0x200003 // keyboard input to move cursor down
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART    0x200004 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of line
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND      0x200005 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of line
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART    0x200006 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of text
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND      0x200007 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of text
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE       0x200008 // keyboard input to delete selection or character under cursor
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE    0x200009 // keyboard input to delete selection or character left of cursor
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO         0x20000A // keyboard input to perform undo
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO         0x20000B // keyboard input to perform redo
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT     0x20000C // keyboard input to move cursor left one word
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT    0x20000D // keyboard input to move cursor right one word
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT        0x400000

#define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION
#include "imstb_textedit.h"

}

void ImGuiInputTextState::OnKeyPressed(int key)
{
    stb_textedit_key(this, &Stb, key);
    CursorFollow = true;
    CursorAnimReset();
}

ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::ImGuiInputTextCallbackData()
{
    memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
}

// Public API to manipulate UTF-8 text
// We expose UTF-8 to the user (unlike the STB_TEXTEDIT_* functions which are manipulating wchar)
// FIXME: The existence of this rarely exercised code path is a bit of a nuisance.
void ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::DeleteChars(int pos, int bytes_count)
{
    IM_ASSERT(pos + bytes_count <= BufTextLen);
    char* dst = Buf + pos;
    char const* src = Buf + pos + bytes_count;
    while (char c = *src++)
        *dst++ = c;
    *dst = '\0';

    if (CursorPos + bytes_count >= pos)
        CursorPos -= bytes_count;
    else if (CursorPos >= pos)
        CursorPos = pos;
    SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos;
    BufDirty = true;
    BufTextLen -= bytes_count;
}

void ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::InsertChars(int pos, char const* new_text, char const* new_text_end)
{
    bool const is_resizable = (Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
    int const new_text_len = new_text_end ? (int)(new_text_end - new_text) : (int)strlen(new_text);
    if (new_text_len + BufTextLen >= BufSize)
    {
        if (!is_resizable)
            return;

        // Contrary to STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS() this is working in the UTF8 buffer, hence the midly similar code (until we remove the U16 buffer alltogether!)
        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
        ImGuiInputTextState* edit_state = &g.InputTextState;
        IM_ASSERT(edit_state->ID != 0 && g.ActiveId == edit_state->ID);
        IM_ASSERT(Buf == edit_state->TextA.Data);
        int new_buf_size = BufTextLen + ImClamp(new_text_len * 4, 32, ImMax(256, new_text_len)) + 1;
        edit_state->TextA.reserve(new_buf_size + 1);
        Buf = edit_state->TextA.Data;
        BufSize = edit_state->BufCapacityA = new_buf_size;
    }

    if (BufTextLen != pos)
        memmove(Buf + pos + new_text_len, Buf + pos, (size_t)(BufTextLen - pos));
    memcpy(Buf + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(char));
    Buf[BufTextLen + new_text_len] = '\0';

    if (CursorPos >= pos)
        CursorPos += new_text_len;
    SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos;
    BufDirty = true;
    BufTextLen += new_text_len;
}

// Return false to discard a character.
static bool InputTextFilterCharacter(unsigned int* p_char, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
{
    unsigned int c = *p_char;

    // Filter non-printable (NB: isprint is unreliable! see #2467)
    if (c < 0x20)
    {
        bool pass = false;
        pass |= (c == '\n' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline));
        pass |= (c == '\t' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput));
        if (!pass)
            return false;
    }

    // We ignore Ascii representation of delete (emitted from Backspace on OSX, see #2578, #2817)
    if (c == 127)
        return false;

    // Filter private Unicode range. GLFW on OSX seems to send private characters for special keys like arrow keys (FIXME)
    if (c >= 0xE000 && c <= 0xF8FF)
        return false;

    // Filter Unicode ranges we are not handling in this build.
    if (c > IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX)
        return false;

    // Generic named filters
    if (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific))
    {
        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal)
            if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != '.') && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/'))
                return false;

        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)
            if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != '.') && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/') && (c != 'e') && (c != 'E'))
                return false;

        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal)
            if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && !(c >= 'a' && c <= 'f') && !(c >= 'A' && c <= 'F'))
                return false;

        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase)
            if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z')
                *p_char = (c += (unsigned int)('A'-'a'));

        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank)
            if (ImCharIsBlankW(c))
                return false;
    }

    // Custom callback filter
    if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter)
    {
        ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
        memset(&callback_data, 0, sizeof(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData));
        callback_data.EventFlag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter;
        callback_data.EventChar = (ImWchar)c;
        callback_data.Flags = flags;
        callback_data.UserData = user_data;
        if (callback(&callback_data) != 0)
            return false;
        *p_char = callback_data.EventChar;
        if (!callback_data.EventChar)
            return false;
    }

    return true;
}

// Edit a string of text
// - buf_size account for the zero-terminator, so a buf_size of 6 can hold "Hello" but not "Hello!".
//   This is so we can easily call InputText() on static arrays using ARRAYSIZE() and to match
//   Note that in std::string world, capacity() would omit 1 byte used by the zero-terminator.
// - When active, hold on a privately held copy of the text (and apply back to 'buf'). So changing 'buf' while the InputText is active has no effect.
// - If you want to use ImGui::InputText() with std::string, see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h
// (FIXME: Rather confusing and messy function, among the worse part of our codebase, expecting to rewrite a V2 at some point.. Partly because we are
//  doing UTF8 > U16 > UTF8 conversions on the go to easily interface with stb_textedit. Ideally should stay in UTF-8 all the time. See https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188)
bool ImGui::InputTextEx(char const* label, char const* hint, char* buf, int buf_size, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* callback_user_data)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    IM_ASSERT(!((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)));        // Can't use both together (they both use up/down keys)
    IM_ASSERT(!((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput))); // Can't use both together (they both use tab key)

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    bool const RENDER_SELECTION_WHEN_INACTIVE = false;
    bool const is_multiline = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline) != 0;
    bool const is_readonly = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly) != 0;
    bool const is_password = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password) != 0;
    bool const is_undoable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoUndoRedo) == 0;
    bool const is_resizable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
    if (is_resizable)
        IM_ASSERT(callback != NULL); // Must provide a callback if you set the ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize flag!

    if (is_multiline) // Open group before calling GetID() because groups tracks id created within their scope,
        BeginGroup();
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImVec2 frame_size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), (is_multiline ? g.FontSize * 8.0f : label_size.y) + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f); // Arbitrary default of 8 lines high for multi-line
    const ImVec2 total_size = ImVec2(frame_size.x + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), frame_size.y);

    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Min + total_size);

    ImGuiWindow* draw_window = window;
    ImVec2 inner_size = frame_size;
    if (is_multiline)
    {
        if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
        {
            ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
            EndGroup();
            return false;
        }
        if (!BeginChildFrame(id, frame_bb.GetSize()))
        {
            EndChildFrame();
            EndGroup();
            return false;
        }
        draw_window = g.CurrentWindow; // Child window
        draw_window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext |= draw_window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask; // This is to ensure that EndChild() will display a navigation highlight
        inner_size.x -= draw_window->ScrollbarSizes.x;
    }
    else
    {
        ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
        if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
            return false;
    }
    bool const hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
    if (hovered)
        g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput;

    // NB: we are only allowed to access 'edit_state' if we are the active widget.
    ImGuiInputTextState* state = NULL;
    if (g.InputTextState.ID == id)
        state = &g.InputTextState;

    bool const focus_requested = FocusableItemRegister(window, id);
    bool const focus_requested_by_code = focus_requested && (g.FocusRequestCurrWindow == window && g.FocusRequestCurrCounterAll == window->DC.FocusCounterAll);
    bool const focus_requested_by_tab = focus_requested && !focus_requested_by_code;

    bool const user_clicked = hovered && io.MouseClicked[0];
    bool const user_nav_input_start = (g.ActiveId != id) && ((g.NavInputId == id) || (g.NavActivateId == id && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard));
    bool const user_scroll_finish = is_multiline && state != NULL && g.ActiveId == 0 && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == GetWindowScrollbarID(draw_window, ImGuiAxis_Y);
    bool const user_scroll_active = is_multiline && state != NULL && g.ActiveId == GetWindowScrollbarID(draw_window, ImGuiAxis_Y);

    bool clear_active_id = false;
    bool select_all = (g.ActiveId != id) && ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll) != 0 || user_nav_input_start) && (!is_multiline);

    bool const init_make_active = (focus_requested || user_clicked || user_scroll_finish || user_nav_input_start);
    bool const init_state = (init_make_active || user_scroll_active);
    if (init_state && g.ActiveId != id)
    {
        // Access state even if we don't own it yet.
        state = &g.InputTextState;
        state->CursorAnimReset();

        // Take a copy of the initial buffer value (both in original UTF-8 format and converted to wchar)
        // From the moment we focused we are ignoring the content of 'buf' (unless we are in read-only mode)
        int const buf_len = (int)strlen(buf);
        state->InitialTextA.resize(buf_len + 1);    // UTF-8. we use +1 to make sure that .Data is always pointing to at least an empty string.
        memcpy(state->InitialTextA.Data, buf, buf_len + 1);

        // Start edition
        char const* buf_end = NULL;
        state->TextW.resize(buf_size + 1);          // wchar count <= UTF-8 count. we use +1 to make sure that .Data is always pointing to at least an empty string.
        state->TextA.resize(0);
        state->TextAIsValid = false;                // TextA is not valid yet (we will display buf until then)
        state->CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(state->TextW.Data, buf_size, buf, NULL, &buf_end);
        state->CurLenA = (int)(buf_end - buf);      // We can't get the result from ImStrncpy() above because it is not UTF-8 aware. Here we'll cut off malformed UTF-8.

        // Preserve cursor position and undo/redo stack if we come back to same widget
        // FIXME: For non-readonly widgets we might be able to require that TextAIsValid && TextA == buf ? (untested) and discard undo stack if user buffer has changed.
        bool const recycle_state = (state->ID == id);
        if (recycle_state)
        {
            // Recycle existing cursor/selection/undo stack but clamp position
            // Note a single mouse click will override the cursor/position immediately by calling stb_textedit_click handler.
            state->CursorClamp();
        }
        else
        {
            state->ID = id;
            state->ScrollX = 0.0f;
            stb_textedit_initialize_state(&state->Stb, !is_multiline);
            if (!is_multiline && focus_requested_by_code)
                select_all = true;
        }
        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysInsertMode)
            state->Stb.insert_mode = 1;
        if (!is_multiline && (focus_requested_by_tab || (user_clicked && io.KeyCtrl)))
            select_all = true;
    }

    if (g.ActiveId != id && init_make_active)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(state && state->ID == id);
        SetActiveID(id, window);
        SetFocusID(id, window);
        FocusWindow(window);

        // Declare our inputs
        IM_ASSERT(ImGuiNavInput_COUNT < 32);
        g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right);
        if (is_multiline || (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory))
            g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
        g.ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask |= (1 << ImGuiNavInput_Cancel);
        g.ActiveIdUsingKeyInputMask |= ((ImU64)1 << ImGuiKey_Home) | ((ImU64)1 << ImGuiKey_End);
        if (is_multiline)
            g.ActiveIdUsingKeyInputMask |= ((ImU64)1 << ImGuiKey_PageUp) | ((ImU64)1 << ImGuiKey_PageDown); // FIXME-NAV: Page up/down actually not supported yet by widget, but claim them ahead.
        if (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion | ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput))  // Disable keyboard tabbing out as we will use the \t character.
            g.ActiveIdUsingKeyInputMask |= ((ImU64)1 << ImGuiKey_Tab);
    }

    // We have an edge case if ActiveId was set through another widget (e.g. widget being swapped), clear id immediately (don't wait until the end of the function)
    if (g.ActiveId == id && state == NULL)
        ClearActiveID();

    // Release focus when we click outside
    if (g.ActiveId == id && io.MouseClicked[0] && !init_state && !init_make_active) //-V560
        clear_active_id = true;

    // Lock the decision of whether we are going to take the path displaying the cursor or selection
    bool const render_cursor = (g.ActiveId == id) || (state && user_scroll_active);
    bool render_selection = state && state->HasSelection() && (RENDER_SELECTION_WHEN_INACTIVE || render_cursor);
    bool value_changed = false;
    bool enter_pressed = false;

    // When read-only we always use the live data passed to the function
    // FIXME-OPT: Because our selection/cursor code currently needs the wide text we need to convert it when active, which is not ideal :(
    if (is_readonly && state != NULL && (render_cursor || render_selection))
    {
        char const* buf_end = NULL;
        state->TextW.resize(buf_size + 1);
        state->CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(state->TextW.Data, state->TextW.Size, buf, NULL, &buf_end);
        state->CurLenA = (int)(buf_end - buf);
        state->CursorClamp();
        render_selection &= state->HasSelection();
    }

    // Select the buffer to render.
    bool const buf_display_from_state = (render_cursor || render_selection || g.ActiveId == id) && !is_readonly && state && state->TextAIsValid;
    bool const is_displaying_hint = (hint != NULL && (buf_display_from_state ? state->TextA.Data : buf)[0] == 0);

    // Password pushes a temporary font with only a fallback glyph
    if (is_password && !is_displaying_hint)
    {
        const ImFontGlyph* glyph = g.Font->FindGlyph('*');
        ImFont* password_font = &g.InputTextPasswordFont;
        password_font->FontSize = g.Font->FontSize;
        password_font->Scale = g.Font->Scale;
        password_font->DisplayOffset = g.Font->DisplayOffset;
        password_font->Ascent = g.Font->Ascent;
        password_font->Descent = g.Font->Descent;
        password_font->ContainerAtlas = g.Font->ContainerAtlas;
        password_font->FallbackGlyph = glyph;
        password_font->FallbackAdvanceX = glyph->AdvanceX;
        IM_ASSERT(password_font->Glyphs.empty() && password_font->IndexAdvanceX.empty() && password_font->IndexLookup.empty());
        PushFont(password_font);
    }

    // Process mouse inputs and character inputs
    int backup_current_text_length = 0;
    if (g.ActiveId == id)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);
        backup_current_text_length = state->CurLenA;
        state->BufCapacityA = buf_size;
        state->UserFlags = flags;
        state->UserCallback = callback;
        state->UserCallbackData = callback_user_data;

        // Although we are active we don't prevent mouse from hovering other elements unless we are interacting right now with the widget.
        // Down the line we should have a cleaner library-wide concept of Selected vs Active.
        g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = !io.MouseDown[0];
        g.WantTextInputNextFrame = 1;

        // Edit in progress
        float const mouse_x = (io.MousePos.x - frame_bb.Min.x - style.FramePadding.x) + state->ScrollX;
        float const mouse_y = (is_multiline ? (io.MousePos.y - draw_window->DC.CursorPos.y - style.FramePadding.y) : (g.FontSize*0.5f));

        bool const is_osx = io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors;
        if (select_all || (hovered && !is_osx && io.MouseDoubleClicked[0]))
        {
            state->SelectAll();
            state->SelectedAllMouseLock = true;
        }
        else if (hovered && is_osx && io.MouseDoubleClicked[0])
        {
            // Double-click select a word only, OS X style (by simulating keystrokes)
            state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT);
            state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
        }
        else if (io.MouseClicked[0] && !state->SelectedAllMouseLock)
        {
            if (hovered)
            {
                stb_textedit_click(state, &state->Stb, mouse_x, mouse_y);
                state->CursorAnimReset();
            }
        }
        else if (io.MouseDown[0] && !state->SelectedAllMouseLock && (io.MouseDelta.x != 0.0f || io.MouseDelta.y != 0.0f))
        {
            stb_textedit_drag(state, &state->Stb, mouse_x, mouse_y);
            state->CursorAnimReset();
            state->CursorFollow = true;
        }
        if (state->SelectedAllMouseLock && !io.MouseDown[0])
            state->SelectedAllMouseLock = false;

        // It is ill-defined whether the back-end needs to send a \t character when pressing the TAB keys.
        // Win32 and GLFW naturally do it but not SDL.
        bool const ignore_char_inputs = (io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt) || (is_osx && io.KeySuper);
        if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput) && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab) && !ignore_char_inputs && !io.KeyShift && !is_readonly)
            if (!io.InputQueueCharacters.contains('\t'))
            {
                unsigned int c = '\t'; // Insert TAB
                if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
                    state->OnKeyPressed((int)c);
            }

        // Process regular text input (before we check for Return because using some IME will effectively send a Return?)
        // We ignore CTRL inputs, but need to allow ALT+CTRL as some keyboards (e.g. German) use AltGR (which _is_ Alt+Ctrl) to input certain characters.
        if (io.InputQueueCharacters.Size > 0)
        {
            if (!ignore_char_inputs && !is_readonly && !user_nav_input_start)
                for (int n = 0; n < io.InputQueueCharacters.Size; n++)
                {
                    // Insert character if they pass filtering
                    unsigned int c = (unsigned int)io.InputQueueCharacters[n];
                    if (c == '\t' && io.KeyShift)
                        continue;
                    if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
                        state->OnKeyPressed((int)c);
                }

            // Consume characters
            io.InputQueueCharacters.resize(0);
        }
    }

    // Process other shortcuts/key-presses
    bool cancel_edit = false;
    if (g.ActiveId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated && !clear_active_id)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);
        int const k_mask = (io.KeyShift ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT : 0);
        bool const is_osx = io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors;
        bool const is_shortcut_key = (is_osx ? (io.KeySuper && !io.KeyCtrl) : (io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeySuper)) && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeyShift; // OS X style: Shortcuts using Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl
        bool const is_osx_shift_shortcut = is_osx && io.KeySuper && io.KeyShift && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt;
        bool const is_wordmove_key_down = is_osx ? io.KeyAlt : io.KeyCtrl;                     // OS X style: Text editing cursor movement using Alt instead of Ctrl
        bool const is_startend_key_down = is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt;  // OS X style: Line/Text Start and End using Cmd+Arrows instead of Home/End
        bool const is_ctrl_key_only = io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyShift && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeySuper;
        bool const is_shift_key_only = io.KeyShift && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeySuper;

        bool const is_cut   = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_X)) || (is_shift_key_only && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Delete))) && !is_readonly && !is_password && (!is_multiline || state->HasSelection());
        bool const is_copy  = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_C)) || (is_ctrl_key_only  && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Insert))) && !is_password && (!is_multiline || state->HasSelection());
        bool const is_paste = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_V)) || (is_shift_key_only && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Insert))) && !is_readonly;
        bool const is_undo  = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Z)) && !is_readonly && is_undoable);
        bool const is_redo  = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Y)) || (is_osx_shift_shortcut && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Z))) && !is_readonly && is_undoable;

        if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow))                        { state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT) | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_RightArrow))                  { state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT) | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_UpArrow) && is_multiline)     { if (io.KeyCtrl) SetScrollY(draw_window, ImMax(draw_window->Scroll.y - g.FontSize, 0.0f)); else state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP) | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_DownArrow) && is_multiline)   { if (io.KeyCtrl) SetScrollY(draw_window, ImMin(draw_window->Scroll.y + g.FontSize, GetScrollMaxY())); else state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN) | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Home))                        { state->OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_End))                         { state->OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Delete) && !is_readonly)      { state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Backspace) && !is_readonly)
        {
            if (!state->HasSelection())
            {
                if (is_wordmove_key_down)
                    state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT|STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
                else if (is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeyCtrl)
                    state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART|STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
            }
            state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE | k_mask);
        }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Enter) || IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_KeyPadEnter))
        {
            bool ctrl_enter_for_new_line = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine) != 0;
            if (!is_multiline || (ctrl_enter_for_new_line && !io.KeyCtrl) || (!ctrl_enter_for_new_line && io.KeyCtrl))
            {
                enter_pressed = clear_active_id = true;
            }
            else if (!is_readonly)
            {
                unsigned int c = '\n'; // Insert new line
                if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
                    state->OnKeyPressed((int)c);
            }
        }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Escape))
        {
            clear_active_id = cancel_edit = true;
        }
        else if (is_undo || is_redo)
        {
            state->OnKeyPressed(is_undo ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO);
            state->ClearSelection();
        }
        else if (is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_A))
        {
            state->SelectAll();
            state->CursorFollow = true;
        }
        else if (is_cut || is_copy)
        {
            // Cut, Copy
            if (io.SetClipboardTextFn)
            {
                int const ib = state->HasSelection() ? ImMin(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end) : 0;
                int const ie = state->HasSelection() ? ImMax(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end) : state->CurLenW;
                int const clipboard_data_len = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(state->TextW.Data + ib, state->TextW.Data + ie) + 1;
                char* clipboard_data = (char*)IM_ALLOC(clipboard_data_len * sizeof(char));
                ImTextStrToUtf8(clipboard_data, clipboard_data_len, state->TextW.Data + ib, state->TextW.Data + ie);
                SetClipboardText(clipboard_data);
                MemFree(clipboard_data);
            }
            if (is_cut)
            {
                if (!state->HasSelection())
                    state->SelectAll();
                state->CursorFollow = true;
                stb_textedit_cut(state, &state->Stb);
            }
        }
        else if (is_paste)
        {
            if (char const* clipboard = GetClipboardText())
            {
                // Filter pasted buffer
                int const clipboard_len = (int)strlen(clipboard);
                ImWchar* clipboard_filtered = (ImWchar*)IM_ALLOC((clipboard_len+1) * sizeof(ImWchar));
                int clipboard_filtered_len = 0;
                for (char const* s = clipboard; *s; )
                {
                    unsigned int c;
                    s += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, s, NULL);
                    if (c == 0)
                        break;
                    if (!InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
                        continue;
                    clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len++] = (ImWchar)c;
                }
                clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len] = 0;
                if (clipboard_filtered_len > 0) // If everything was filtered, ignore the pasting operation
                {
                    stb_textedit_paste(state, &state->Stb, clipboard_filtered, clipboard_filtered_len);
                    state->CursorFollow = true;
                }
                MemFree(clipboard_filtered);
            }
        }

        // Update render selection flag after events have been handled, so selection highlight can be displayed during the same frame.
        render_selection |= state->HasSelection() && (RENDER_SELECTION_WHEN_INACTIVE || render_cursor);
    }

    // Process callbacks and apply result back to user's buffer.
    if (g.ActiveId == id)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);
        char const* apply_new_text = NULL;
        int apply_new_text_length = 0;
        if (cancel_edit)
        {
            // Restore initial value. Only return true if restoring to the initial value changes the current buffer contents.
            if (!is_readonly && strcmp(buf, state->InitialTextA.Data) != 0)
            {
                apply_new_text = state->InitialTextA.Data;
                apply_new_text_length = state->InitialTextA.Size - 1;
            }
        }

        // When using 'ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue' as a special case we reapply the live buffer back to the input buffer before clearing ActiveId, even though strictly speaking it wasn't modified on this frame.
        // If we didn't do that, code like InputInt() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue would fail. Also this allows the user to use InputText() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue without maintaining any user-side storage.
        bool apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer = !cancel_edit || (enter_pressed && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0);
        if (apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer)
        {
            // Apply new value immediately - copy modified buffer back
            // Note that as soon as the input box is active, the in-widget value gets priority over any underlying modification of the input buffer
            // FIXME: We actually always render 'buf' when calling DrawList->AddText, making the comment above incorrect.
            // FIXME-OPT: CPU waste to do this every time the widget is active, should mark dirty state from the stb_textedit callbacks.
            if (!is_readonly)
            {
                state->TextAIsValid = true;
                state->TextA.resize(state->TextW.Size * 4 + 1);
                ImTextStrToUtf8(state->TextA.Data, state->TextA.Size, state->TextW.Data, NULL);
            }

            // User callback
            if ((flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways)) != 0)
            {
                IM_ASSERT(callback != NULL);

                // The reason we specify the usage semantic (Completion/History) is that Completion needs to disable keyboard TABBING at the moment.
                ImGuiInputTextFlags event_flag = 0;
                ImGuiKey event_key = ImGuiKey_COUNT;
                if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) != 0 && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab))
                {
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion;
                    event_key = ImGuiKey_Tab;
                }
                else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_UpArrow))
                {
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory;
                    event_key = ImGuiKey_UpArrow;
                }
                else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_DownArrow))
                {
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory;
                    event_key = ImGuiKey_DownArrow;
                }
                else if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways)
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways;

                if (event_flag)
                {
                    ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
                    memset(&callback_data, 0, sizeof(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData));
                    callback_data.EventFlag = event_flag;
                    callback_data.Flags = flags;
                    callback_data.UserData = callback_user_data;

                    callback_data.EventKey = event_key;
                    callback_data.Buf = state->TextA.Data;
                    callback_data.BufTextLen = state->CurLenA;
                    callback_data.BufSize = state->BufCapacityA;
                    callback_data.BufDirty = false;

                    // We have to convert from wchar-positions to UTF-8-positions, which can be pretty slow (an incentive to ditch the ImWchar buffer, see https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188)
                    ImWchar* text = state->TextW.Data;
                    int const utf8_cursor_pos = callback_data.CursorPos = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + state->Stb.cursor);
                    int const utf8_selection_start = callback_data.SelectionStart = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + state->Stb.select_start);
                    int const utf8_selection_end = callback_data.SelectionEnd = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + state->Stb.select_end);

                    // Call user code
                    callback(&callback_data);

                    // Read back what user may have modified
                    IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Buf == state->TextA.Data);  // Invalid to modify those fields
                    IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufSize == state->BufCapacityA);
                    IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Flags == flags);
                    if (callback_data.CursorPos != utf8_cursor_pos)            { state->Stb.cursor = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.CursorPos); state->CursorFollow = true; }
                    if (callback_data.SelectionStart != utf8_selection_start)  { state->Stb.select_start = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionStart); }
                    if (callback_data.SelectionEnd != utf8_selection_end)      { state->Stb.select_end = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionEnd); }
                    if (callback_data.BufDirty)
                    {
                        IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufTextLen == (int)strlen(callback_data.Buf)); // You need to maintain BufTextLen if you change the text!
                        if (callback_data.BufTextLen > backup_current_text_length && is_resizable)
                            state->TextW.resize(state->TextW.Size + (callback_data.BufTextLen - backup_current_text_length));
                        state->CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(state->TextW.Data, state->TextW.Size, callback_data.Buf, NULL);
                        state->CurLenA = callback_data.BufTextLen;  // Assume correct length and valid UTF-8 from user, saves us an extra strlen()
                        state->CursorAnimReset();
                    }
                }
            }

            // Will copy result string if modified
            if (!is_readonly && strcmp(state->TextA.Data, buf) != 0)
            {
                apply_new_text = state->TextA.Data;
                apply_new_text_length = state->CurLenA;
            }
        }

        // Copy result to user buffer
        if (apply_new_text)
        {
            IM_ASSERT(apply_new_text_length >= 0);
            if (backup_current_text_length != apply_new_text_length && is_resizable)
            {
                ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
                callback_data.EventFlag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize;
                callback_data.Flags = flags;
                callback_data.Buf = buf;
                callback_data.BufTextLen = apply_new_text_length;
                callback_data.BufSize = ImMax(buf_size, apply_new_text_length + 1);
                callback_data.UserData = callback_user_data;
                callback(&callback_data);
                buf = callback_data.Buf;
                buf_size = callback_data.BufSize;
                apply_new_text_length = ImMin(callback_data.BufTextLen, buf_size - 1);
                IM_ASSERT(apply_new_text_length <= buf_size);
            }

            // If the underlying buffer resize was denied or not carried to the next frame, apply_new_text_length+1 may be >= buf_size.
            ImStrncpy(buf, apply_new_text, ImMin(apply_new_text_length + 1, buf_size));
            value_changed = true;
        }

        // Clear temporary user storage
        state->UserFlags = 0;
        state->UserCallback = NULL;
        state->UserCallbackData = NULL;
    }

    // Release active ID at the end of the function (so e.g. pressing Return still does a application of the value)
    if (clear_active_id && g.ActiveId == id)
        ClearActiveID();

    // Render frame
    if (!is_multiline)
    {
        RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
        RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
    }

    const ImVec4 clip_rect(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y, frame_bb.Min.x + inner_size.x, frame_bb.Min.y + inner_size.y); // Not using frame_bb.Max because we have adjusted size
    ImVec2 draw_pos = is_multiline ? draw_window->DC.CursorPos : frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding;
    ImVec2 text_size(0.0f, 0.0f);

    // Set upper limit of single-line InputTextEx() at 2 million characters strings. The current pathological worst case is a long line
    // without any carriage return, which would makes ImFont::RenderText() reserve too many vertices and probably crash. Avoid it altogether.
    // Note that we only use this limit on single-line InputText(), so a pathologically large line on a InputTextMultiline() would still crash.
    int const buf_display_max_length = 2 * 1024 * 1024;
    char const* buf_display = buf_display_from_state ? state->TextA.Data : buf; //-V595
    char const* buf_display_end = NULL; // We have specialized paths below for setting the length
    if (is_displaying_hint)
    {
        buf_display = hint;
        buf_display_end = hint + strlen(hint);
    }

    // Render text. We currently only render selection when the widget is active or while scrolling.
    // FIXME: We could remove the '&& render_cursor' to keep rendering selection when inactive.
    if (render_cursor || render_selection)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);
        if (!is_displaying_hint)
            buf_display_end = buf_display + state->CurLenA;

        // Render text (with cursor and selection)
        // This is going to be messy. We need to:
        // - Display the text (this alone can be more easily clipped)
        // - Handle scrolling, highlight selection, display cursor (those all requires some form of 1d->2d cursor position calculation)
        // - Measure text height (for scrollbar)
        // We are attempting to do most of that in **one main pass** to minimize the computation cost (non-negligible for large amount of text) + 2nd pass for selection rendering (we could merge them by an extra refactoring effort)
        // FIXME: This should occur on buf_display but we'd need to maintain cursor/select_start/select_end for UTF-8.
        const ImWchar* text_begin = state->TextW.Data;
        ImVec2 cursor_offset, select_start_offset;

        {
            // Find lines numbers straddling 'cursor' (slot 0) and 'select_start' (slot 1) positions.
            const ImWchar* searches_input_ptr[2] = { NULL, NULL };
            int searches_result_line_no[2] = { -1000, -1000 };
            int searches_remaining = 0;
            if (render_cursor)
            {
                searches_input_ptr[0] = text_begin + state->Stb.cursor;
                searches_result_line_no[0] = -1;
                searches_remaining++;
            }
            if (render_selection)
            {
                searches_input_ptr[1] = text_begin + ImMin(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end);
                searches_result_line_no[1] = -1;
                searches_remaining++;
            }

            // Iterate all lines to find our line numbers
            // In multi-line mode, we never exit the loop until all lines are counted, so add one extra to the searches_remaining counter.
            searches_remaining += is_multiline ? 1 : 0;
            int line_count = 0;
            //for (const ImWchar* s = text_begin; (s = (const ImWchar*)wcschr((const wchar_t*)s, (wchar_t)'\n')) != NULL; s++)  // FIXME-OPT: Could use this when wchar_t are 16-bit
            for (const ImWchar* s = text_begin; *s != 0; s++)
                if (*s == '\n')
                {
                    line_count++;
                    if (searches_result_line_no[0] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[0]) { searches_result_line_no[0] = line_count; if (--searches_remaining <= 0) break; }
                    if (searches_result_line_no[1] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[1]) { searches_result_line_no[1] = line_count; if (--searches_remaining <= 0) break; }
                }
            line_count++;
            if (searches_result_line_no[0] == -1)
                searches_result_line_no[0] = line_count;
            if (searches_result_line_no[1] == -1)
                searches_result_line_no[1] = line_count;

            // Calculate 2d position by finding the beginning of the line and measuring distance
            cursor_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[0], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[0]).x;
            cursor_offset.y = searches_result_line_no[0] * g.FontSize;
            if (searches_result_line_no[1] >= 0)
            {
                select_start_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[1], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[1]).x;
                select_start_offset.y = searches_result_line_no[1] * g.FontSize;
            }

            // Store text height (note that we haven't calculated text width at all, see GitHub issues #383, #1224)
            if (is_multiline)
                text_size = ImVec2(inner_size.x, line_count * g.FontSize);
        }

        // Scroll
        if (render_cursor && state->CursorFollow)
        {
            // Horizontal scroll in chunks of quarter width
            if (!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoHorizontalScroll))
            {
                float const scroll_increment_x = inner_size.x * 0.25f;
                if (cursor_offset.x < state->ScrollX)
                    state->ScrollX = IM_FLOOR(ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.x - scroll_increment_x));
                else if (cursor_offset.x - inner_size.x >= state->ScrollX)
                    state->ScrollX = IM_FLOOR(cursor_offset.x - inner_size.x + scroll_increment_x);
            }
            else
            {
                state->ScrollX = 0.0f;
            }

            // Vertical scroll
            if (is_multiline)
            {
                float scroll_y = draw_window->Scroll.y;
                if (cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize < scroll_y)
                    scroll_y = ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize);
                else if (cursor_offset.y - inner_size.y >= scroll_y)
                    scroll_y = cursor_offset.y - inner_size.y;
                draw_pos.y += (draw_window->Scroll.y - scroll_y);   // Manipulate cursor pos immediately avoid a frame of lag
                draw_window->Scroll.y = scroll_y;
            }

            state->CursorFollow = false;
        }

        // Draw selection
        const ImVec2 draw_scroll = ImVec2(state->ScrollX, 0.0f);
        if (render_selection)
        {
            const ImWchar* text_selected_begin = text_begin + ImMin(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end);
            const ImWchar* text_selected_end = text_begin + ImMax(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end);

            ImU32 bg_color = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg, render_cursor ? 1.0f : 0.6f); // FIXME: current code flow mandate that render_cursor is always true here, we are leaving the transparent one for tests.
            float bg_offy_up = is_multiline ? 0.0f : -1.0f;    // FIXME: those offsets should be part of the style? they don't play so well with multi-line selection.
            float bg_offy_dn = is_multiline ? 0.0f : 2.0f;
            ImVec2 rect_pos = draw_pos + select_start_offset - draw_scroll;
            for (const ImWchar* p = text_selected_begin; p < text_selected_end; )
            {
                if (rect_pos.y > clip_rect.w + g.FontSize)
                    break;
                if (rect_pos.y < clip_rect.y)
                {
                    //p = (const ImWchar*)wmemchr((const wchar_t*)p, '\n', text_selected_end - p);  // FIXME-OPT: Could use this when wchar_t are 16-bit
                    //p = p ? p + 1 : text_selected_end;
                    while (p < text_selected_end)
                        if (*p++ == '\n')
                            break;
                }
                else
                {
                    ImVec2 rect_size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(p, text_selected_end, &p, NULL, true);
                    if (rect_size.x <= 0.0f) rect_size.x = IM_FLOOR(g.Font->GetCharAdvance((ImWchar)' ') * 0.50f); // So we can see selected empty lines
                    ImRect rect(rect_pos + ImVec2(0.0f, bg_offy_up - g.FontSize), rect_pos +ImVec2(rect_size.x, bg_offy_dn));
                    rect.ClipWith(clip_rect);
                    if (rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
                        draw_window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(rect.Min, rect.Max, bg_color);
                }
                rect_pos.x = draw_pos.x - draw_scroll.x;
                rect_pos.y += g.FontSize;
            }
        }

        // We test for 'buf_display_max_length' as a way to avoid some pathological cases (e.g. single-line 1 MB string) which would make ImDrawList crash.
        if (is_multiline || (buf_display_end - buf_display) < buf_display_max_length)
        {
            ImU32 col = GetColorU32(is_displaying_hint ? ImGuiCol_TextDisabled : ImGuiCol_Text);
            draw_window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, draw_pos - draw_scroll, col, buf_display, buf_display_end, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect);
        }

        // Draw blinking cursor
        if (render_cursor)
        {
            state->CursorAnim += io.DeltaTime;
            bool cursor_is_visible = (!g.IO.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink) || (state->CursorAnim <= 0.0f) || ImFmod(state->CursorAnim, 1.20f) <= 0.80f;
            ImVec2 cursor_screen_pos = draw_pos + cursor_offset - draw_scroll;
            ImRect cursor_screen_rect(cursor_screen_pos.x, cursor_screen_pos.y - g.FontSize + 0.5f, cursor_screen_pos.x + 1.0f, cursor_screen_pos.y - 1.5f);
            if (cursor_is_visible && cursor_screen_rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
                draw_window->DrawList->AddLine(cursor_screen_rect.Min, cursor_screen_rect.GetBL(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));

            // Notify OS of text input position for advanced IME (-1 x offset so that Windows IME can cover our cursor. Bit of an extra nicety.)
            if (!is_readonly)
            {
                g.PlatformImePos = ImVec2(cursor_screen_pos.x - 1, cursor_screen_pos.y - g.FontSize);
                g.PlatformImePosViewport = window->Viewport;
            }
        }
    }
    else
    {
        // Render text only (no selection, no cursor)
        if (is_multiline)
            text_size = ImVec2(inner_size.x, InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(buf_display, &buf_display_end) * g.FontSize); // We don't need width
        else if (!is_displaying_hint && g.ActiveId == id)
            buf_display_end = buf_display + state->CurLenA;
        else if (!is_displaying_hint)
            buf_display_end = buf_display + strlen(buf_display);

        if (is_multiline || (buf_display_end - buf_display) < buf_display_max_length)
        {
            ImU32 col = GetColorU32(is_displaying_hint ? ImGuiCol_TextDisabled : ImGuiCol_Text);
            draw_window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, draw_pos, col, buf_display, buf_display_end, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect);
        }
    }

    if (is_multiline)
    {
        Dummy(text_size + ImVec2(0.0f, g.FontSize)); // Always add room to scroll an extra line
        EndChildFrame();
        EndGroup();
    }

    if (is_password && !is_displaying_hint)
        PopFont();

    // Log as text
    if (g.LogEnabled && !(is_password && !is_displaying_hint))
        LogRenderedText(&draw_pos, buf_display, buf_display_end);

    if (label_size.x > 0)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    if (value_changed && !(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited))
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags);
    if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0)
        return enter_pressed;
    else
        return value_changed;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - ColorEdit3()
// - ColorEdit4()
// - ColorPicker3()
// - RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard() [Internal]
// - ColorPicker4()
// - ColorButton()
// - SetColorEditOptions()
// - ColorTooltip() [Internal]
// - ColorEditOptionsPopup() [Internal]
// - ColorPickerOptionsPopup() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

bool ImGui::ColorEdit3(char const* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    return ColorEdit4(label, col, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
}

// Edit colors components (each component in 0.0f..1.0f range).
// See enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_ for available options. e.g. Only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
// With typical options: Left-click on colored square to open color picker. Right-click to open option menu. CTRL-Click over input fields to edit them and TAB to go to next item.
bool ImGui::ColorEdit4(char const* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    float const square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
    float const w_full = CalcItemWidth();
    float const w_button = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview) ? 0.0f : (square_sz + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
    float const w_inputs = w_full - w_button;
    char const* label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    g.NextItemData.ClearFlags();

    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);

    // If we're not showing any slider there's no point in doing any HSV conversions
    const ImGuiColorEditFlags flags_untouched = flags;
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs)
        flags = (flags & (~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask)) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions;

    // Context menu: display and modify options (before defaults are applied)
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
        ColorEditOptionsPopup(col, flags);

    // Read stored options
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask);
    flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask));
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask)); // Check that only 1 is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask));   // Check that only 1 is selected

    bool const alpha = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) == 0;
    bool const hdr = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR) != 0;
    int const components = alpha ? 4 : 3;

    // Convert to the formats we need
    float f[4] = { col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f };
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB))
        ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
    else if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV))
    {
        // Hue is lost when converting from greyscale rgb (saturation=0). Restore it.
        ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
        if (f[1] == 0 && memcmp(g.ColorEditLastColor, col, sizeof(float) * 3) == 0)
            f[0] = g.ColorEditLastHue;
    }
    int i[4] = { IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[0]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[1]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[2]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[3]) };

    bool value_changed = false;
    bool value_changed_as_float = false;

    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    float const inputs_offset_x = (style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left) ? w_button : 0.0f;
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = pos.x + inputs_offset_x;

    if ((flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV)) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
    {
        // RGB/HSV 0..255 Sliders
        float const w_item_one  = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR((w_inputs - (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)) / (float)components));
        float const w_item_last = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(w_inputs - (w_item_one + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)));

        bool const hide_prefix = (w_item_one <= CalcTextSize((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) ? "M:0.000" : "M:000").x);
        static char const* ids[4] = { "##X", "##Y", "##Z", "##W" };
        static char const* fmt_table_int[3][4] =
        {
            {   "%3d",   "%3d",   "%3d",   "%3d" }, // Short display
            { "R:%3d", "G:%3d", "B:%3d", "A:%3d" }, // Long display for RGBA
            { "H:%3d", "S:%3d", "V:%3d", "A:%3d" }  // Long display for HSVA
        };
        static char const* fmt_table_float[3][4] =
        {
            {   "%0.3f",   "%0.3f",   "%0.3f",   "%0.3f" }, // Short display
            { "R:%0.3f", "G:%0.3f", "B:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f" }, // Long display for RGBA
            { "H:%0.3f", "S:%0.3f", "V:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f" }  // Long display for HSVA
        };
        int const fmt_idx = hide_prefix ? 0 : (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) ? 2 : 1;

        for (int n = 0; n < components; n++)
        {
            if (n > 0)
                SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
            SetNextItemWidth((n + 1 < components) ? w_item_one : w_item_last);

            // Disable Hue edit when Saturation is zero
            bool const disable_hue_edit = (n == 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) && i[1] == 0);
            if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float)
            {
                value_changed |= DragFloat(ids[n], &f[n], 1.0f/255.0f, disable_hue_edit ? +FLT_MAX : 0.0f, disable_hue_edit ? -FLT_MAX : hdr ? 0.0f : 1.0f, fmt_table_float[fmt_idx][n]);
                value_changed_as_float |= value_changed;
            }
            else
            {
                value_changed |= DragInt(ids[n], &i[n], 1.0f, disable_hue_edit ? INT_MAX : 0, disable_hue_edit ? INT_MIN : hdr ? 0 : 255, fmt_table_int[fmt_idx][n]);
            }
            if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
                OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
        }
    }
    else if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
    {
        // RGB Hexadecimal Input
        char buf[64];
        if (alpha)
            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X%02X", ImClamp(i[0],0,255), ImClamp(i[1],0,255), ImClamp(i[2],0,255), ImClamp(i[3],0,255));
        else
            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X", ImClamp(i[0],0,255), ImClamp(i[1],0,255), ImClamp(i[2],0,255));
        SetNextItemWidth(w_inputs);
        if (InputText("##Text", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase))
        {
            value_changed = true;
            char* p = buf;
            while (*p == '#' || ImCharIsBlankA(*p))
                p++;
            i[0] = i[1] = i[2] = i[3] = 0;
            if (alpha)
                sscanf(p, "%02X%02X%02X%02X", (unsigned int*)&i[0], (unsigned int*)&i[1], (unsigned int*)&i[2], (unsigned int*)&i[3]); // Treat at unsigned (%X is unsigned)
            else
                sscanf(p, "%02X%02X%02X", (unsigned int*)&i[0], (unsigned int*)&i[1], (unsigned int*)&i[2]);
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
    }

    ImGuiWindow* picker_active_window = NULL;
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview))
    {
        float const button_offset_x = ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) || (style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left)) ? 0.0f : w_inputs + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
        window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(pos.x + button_offset_x, pos.y);

        const ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f);
        if (ColorButton("##ColorButton", col_v4, flags))
        {
            if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker))
            {
                // Store current color and open a picker
                g.ColorPickerRef = col_v4;
                OpenPopup("picker");
                SetNextWindowPos(window->DC.LastItemRect.GetBL() + ImVec2(-1,style.ItemSpacing.y));
            }
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");

        if (BeginPopup("picker"))
        {
            picker_active_window = g.CurrentWindow;
            if (label != label_display_end)
            {
                TextEx(label, label_display_end);
                Spacing();
            }
            ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar;
            ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = (flags_untouched & picker_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
            SetNextItemWidth(square_sz * 12.0f); // Use 256 + bar sizes?
            value_changed |= ColorPicker4("##picker", col, picker_flags, &g.ColorPickerRef.x);
            EndPopup();
        }
    }

    if (label != label_display_end && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
    {
        window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(pos.x + w_full + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, pos.y + style.FramePadding.y);
        TextEx(label, label_display_end);
    }

    // Convert back
    if (value_changed && picker_active_window == NULL)
    {
        if (!value_changed_as_float)
            for (int n = 0; n < 4; n++)
                f[n] = i[n] / 255.0f;
        if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB))
        {
            g.ColorEditLastHue = f[0];
            ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
            memcpy(g.ColorEditLastColor, f, sizeof(float) * 3);
        }
        if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV))
            ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);

        col[0] = f[0];
        col[1] = f[1];
        col[2] = f[2];
        if (alpha)
            col[3] = f[3];
    }

    PopID();
    EndGroup();

    // Drag and Drop Target
    // NB: The flag test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropTarget() does the same test.
    if ((window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropTarget())
    {
        bool accepted_drag_drop = false;
        if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F))
        {
            memcpy((float*)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 3); // Preserve alpha if any //-V512
            value_changed = accepted_drag_drop = true;
        }
        if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F))
        {
            memcpy((float*)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * components);
            value_changed = accepted_drag_drop = true;
        }

        // Drag-drop payloads are always RGB
        if (accepted_drag_drop && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV))
            ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], col[0], col[1], col[2]);
        EndDragDropTarget();
    }

    // When picker is being actively used, use its active id so IsItemActive() will function on ColorEdit4().
    if (picker_active_window && g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdWindow == picker_active_window)
        window->DC.LastItemId = g.ActiveId;

    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(window->DC.LastItemId);

    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::ColorPicker3(char const* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    float col4[4] = { col[0], col[1], col[2], 1.0f };
    if (!ColorPicker4(label, col4, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha))
        return false;
    col[0] = col4[0]; col[1] = col4[1]; col[2] = col4[2];
    return true;
}

static inline ImU32 ImAlphaBlendColor(ImU32 col_a, ImU32 col_b)
{
    float t = ((col_b >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF) / 255.f;
    int r = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
    int g = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
    int b = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
    return IM_COL32(r, g, b, 0xFF);
}

// Helper for ColorPicker4()
// NB: This is rather brittle and will show artifact when rounding this enabled if rounded corners overlap multiple cells. Caller currently responsible for avoiding that.
// I spent a non reasonable amount of time trying to getting this right for ColorButton with rounding+anti-aliasing+ImGuiColorEditFlags_HalfAlphaPreview flag + various grid sizes and offsets, and eventually gave up... probably more reasonable to disable rounding alltogether.
void ImGui::RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 col, float grid_step, ImVec2 grid_off, float rounding, int rounding_corners_flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) < 0xFF)
    {
        ImU32 col_bg1 = GetColorU32(ImAlphaBlendColor(IM_COL32(204,204,204,255), col));
        ImU32 col_bg2 = GetColorU32(ImAlphaBlendColor(IM_COL32(128,128,128,255), col));
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, col_bg1, rounding, rounding_corners_flags);

        int yi = 0;
        for (float y = p_min.y + grid_off.y; y < p_max.y; y += grid_step, yi++)
        {
            float y1 = ImClamp(y, p_min.y, p_max.y), y2 = ImMin(y + grid_step, p_max.y);
            if (y2 <= y1)
                continue;
            for (float x = p_min.x + grid_off.x + (yi & 1) * grid_step; x < p_max.x; x += grid_step * 2.0f)
            {
                float x1 = ImClamp(x, p_min.x, p_max.x), x2 = ImMin(x + grid_step, p_max.x);
                if (x2 <= x1)
                    continue;
                int rounding_corners_flags_cell = 0;
                if (y1 <= p_min.y) { if (x1 <= p_min.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft; if (x2 >= p_max.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight; }
                if (y2 >= p_max.y) { if (x1 <= p_min.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft; if (x2 >= p_max.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight; }
                rounding_corners_flags_cell &= rounding_corners_flags;
                window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x1,y1), ImVec2(x2,y2), col_bg2, rounding_corners_flags_cell ? rounding : 0.0f, rounding_corners_flags_cell);
            }
        }
    }
    else
    {
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, col, rounding, rounding_corners_flags);
    }
}

// Helper for ColorPicker4()
static void RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 half_sz, float bar_w, float alpha)
{
    ImU32 alpha8 = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(alpha);
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x + 1,         pos.y), ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1), ImGuiDir_Right, IM_COL32(0,0,0,alpha8));
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x,             pos.y), half_sz,                              ImGuiDir_Right, IM_COL32(255,255,255,alpha8));
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x - 1, pos.y), ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1), ImGuiDir_Left,  IM_COL32(0,0,0,alpha8));
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x,     pos.y), half_sz,                              ImGuiDir_Left,  IM_COL32(255,255,255,alpha8));
}

// Note: ColorPicker4() only accesses 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
// (In C++ the 'float col[4]' notation for a function argument is equivalent to 'float* col', we only specify a size to facilitate understanding of the code.)
// FIXME: we adjust the big color square height based on item width, which may cause a flickering feedback loop (if automatic height makes a vertical scrollbar appears, affecting automatic width..)
// FIXME: this is trying to be aware of style.Alpha but not fully correct. Also, the color wheel will have overlapping glitches with (style.Alpha < 1.0)
bool ImGui::ColorPicker4(char const* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, float const* ref_col)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImDrawList* draw_list = window->DrawList;
    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;

    float const width = CalcItemWidth();
    g.NextItemData.ClearFlags();

    PushID(label);
    BeginGroup();

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview;

    // Context menu: display and store options.
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
        ColorPickerOptionsPopup(col, flags);

    // Read stored options
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask))
        flags |= ((g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask) ? g.ColorEditOptions : ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault) & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask;
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask))
        flags |= ((g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask) ? g.ColorEditOptions : ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault) & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask;
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask)); // Check that only 1 is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask));  // Check that only 1 is selected
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);

    // Setup
    int components = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 3 : 4;
    bool alpha_bar = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
    ImVec2 picker_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
    float bars_width = square_sz; // Arbitrary smallish width of Hue/Alpha picking bars
    float sv_picker_size = ImMax(bars_width * 1, width - (alpha_bar ? 2 : 1) * (bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x)); // Saturation/Value picking box
    float bar0_pos_x = picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
    float bar1_pos_x = bar0_pos_x + bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
    float bars_triangles_half_sz = IM_FLOOR(bars_width * 0.20f);

    float backup_initial_col[4];
    memcpy(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float));

    float wheel_thickness = sv_picker_size * 0.08f;
    float wheel_r_outer = sv_picker_size * 0.50f;
    float wheel_r_inner = wheel_r_outer - wheel_thickness;
    ImVec2 wheel_center(picker_pos.x + (sv_picker_size + bars_width)*0.5f, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size*0.5f);

    // Note: the triangle is displayed rotated with triangle_pa pointing to Hue, but most coordinates stays unrotated for logic.
    float triangle_r = wheel_r_inner - (int)(sv_picker_size * 0.027f);
    ImVec2 triangle_pa = ImVec2(triangle_r, 0.0f); // Hue point.
    ImVec2 triangle_pb = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * -0.866025f); // Black point.
    ImVec2 triangle_pc = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * +0.866025f); // White point.

    float H = col[0], S = col[1], V = col[2];
    float R = col[0], G = col[1], B = col[2];
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB)
    {
        // Hue is lost when converting from greyscale rgb (saturation=0). Restore it.
        ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(R, G, B, H, S, V);
        if (S == 0 && memcmp(g.ColorEditLastColor, col, sizeof(float) * 3) == 0)
            H = g.ColorEditLastHue;
    }
    else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
    {
        ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, V, R, G, B);
    }

    bool value_changed = false, value_changed_h = false, value_changed_sv = false;

    PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav, true);
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel)
    {
        // Hue wheel + SV triangle logic
        InvisibleButton("hsv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + bars_width, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive())
        {
            ImVec2 initial_off = g.IO.MouseClickedPos[0] - wheel_center;
            ImVec2 current_off = g.IO.MousePos - wheel_center;
            float initial_dist2 = ImLengthSqr(initial_off);
            if (initial_dist2 >= (wheel_r_inner-1)*(wheel_r_inner-1) && initial_dist2 <= (wheel_r_outer+1)*(wheel_r_outer+1))
            {
                // Interactive with Hue wheel
                H = ImAtan2(current_off.y, current_off.x) / IM_PI*0.5f;
                if (H < 0.0f)
                    H += 1.0f;
                value_changed = value_changed_h = true;
            }
            float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
            float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
            if (ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, ImRotate(initial_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle)))
            {
                // Interacting with SV triangle
                ImVec2 current_off_unrotated = ImRotate(current_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
                if (!ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated))
                    current_off_unrotated = ImTriangleClosestPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated);
                float uu, vv, ww;
                ImTriangleBarycentricCoords(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated, uu, vv, ww);
                V = ImClamp(1.0f - vv, 0.0001f, 1.0f);
                S = ImClamp(uu / V, 0.0001f, 1.0f);
                value_changed = value_changed_sv = true;
            }
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
    }
    else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar)
    {
        // SV rectangle logic
        InvisibleButton("sv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive())
        {
            S = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.x - picker_pos.x) / (sv_picker_size-1));
            V = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size-1));
            value_changed = value_changed_sv = true;
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");

        // Hue bar logic
        SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y));
        InvisibleButton("hue", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive())
        {
            H = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size-1));
            value_changed = value_changed_h = true;
        }
    }

    // Alpha bar logic
    if (alpha_bar)
    {
        SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y));
        InvisibleButton("alpha", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive())
        {
            col[3] = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size-1));
            value_changed = true;
        }
    }
    PopItemFlag(); // ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
    {
        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        BeginGroup();
    }

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
    {
        char const* label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
        if (label != label_display_end)
        {
            if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
                SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
            TextEx(label, label_display_end);
        }
    }

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
    {
        PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus, true);
        ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
        if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
            Text("Current");

        ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip;
        ColorButton("##current", col_v4, (flags & sub_flags_to_forward), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2));
        if (ref_col != NULL)
        {
            Text("Original");
            ImVec4 ref_col_v4(ref_col[0], ref_col[1], ref_col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : ref_col[3]);
            if (ColorButton("##original", ref_col_v4, (flags & sub_flags_to_forward), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2)))
            {
                memcpy(col, ref_col, components * sizeof(float));
                value_changed = true;
            }
        }
        PopItemFlag();
        EndGroup();
    }

    // Convert back color to RGB
    if (value_changed_h || value_changed_sv)
    {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB)
        {
            ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H >= 1.0f ? H - 10 * 1e-6f : H, S > 0.0f ? S : 10*1e-6f, V > 0.0f ? V : 1e-6f, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
            g.ColorEditLastHue = H;
            memcpy(g.ColorEditLastColor, col, sizeof(float) * 3);
        }
        else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
        {
            col[0] = H;
            col[1] = S;
            col[2] = V;
        }
    }

    // R,G,B and H,S,V slider color editor
    bool value_changed_fix_hue_wrap = false;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
    {
        PushItemWidth((alpha_bar ? bar1_pos_x : bar0_pos_x) + bars_width - picker_pos.x);
        ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
        ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags = (flags & sub_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker;
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask) == 0)
            if (ColorEdit4("##rgb", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB))
            {
                // FIXME: Hackily differenciating using the DragInt (ActiveId != 0 && !ActiveIdAllowOverlap) vs. using the InputText or DropTarget.
                // For the later we don't want to run the hue-wrap canceling code. If you are well versed in HSV picker please provide your input! (See #2050)
                value_changed_fix_hue_wrap = (g.ActiveId != 0 && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap);
                value_changed = true;
            }
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask) == 0)
            value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hsv", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV);
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask) == 0)
            value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hex", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex);
        PopItemWidth();
    }

    // Try to cancel hue wrap (after ColorEdit4 call), if any
    if (value_changed_fix_hue_wrap && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB))
    {
        float new_H, new_S, new_V;
        ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], new_H, new_S, new_V);
        if (new_H <= 0 && H > 0)
        {
            if (new_V <= 0 && V != new_V)
                ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, new_V <= 0 ? V * 0.5f : new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
            else if (new_S <= 0)
                ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, new_S <= 0 ? S * 0.5f : new_S, new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
        }
    }

    if (value_changed)
    {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB)
        {
            R = col[0];
            G = col[1];
            B = col[2];
            ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(R, G, B, H, S, V);
            if (S == 0 && memcmp(g.ColorEditLastColor, col, sizeof(float) * 3) == 0) // Fix local Hue as display below will use it immediately.
                H = g.ColorEditLastHue;
        }
        else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
        {
            H = col[0];
            S = col[1];
            V = col[2];
            ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, V, R, G, B);
        }
    }

    int const style_alpha8 = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(style.Alpha);
    const ImU32 col_black = IM_COL32(0,0,0,style_alpha8);
    const ImU32 col_white = IM_COL32(255,255,255,style_alpha8);
    const ImU32 col_midgrey = IM_COL32(128,128,128,style_alpha8);
    const ImU32 col_hues[6 + 1] = { IM_COL32(255,0,0,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(255,255,0,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(0,255,0,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(0,255,255,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(0,0,255,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(255,0,255,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(255,0,0,style_alpha8) };

    ImVec4 hue_color_f(1, 1, 1, style.Alpha); ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, 1, 1, hue_color_f.x, hue_color_f.y, hue_color_f.z);
    ImU32 hue_color32 = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(hue_color_f);
    ImU32 user_col32_striped_of_alpha = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(R, G, B, style.Alpha)); // Important: this is still including the main rendering/style alpha!!

    ImVec2 sv_cursor_pos;

    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel)
    {
        // Render Hue Wheel
        float const aeps = 0.5f / wheel_r_outer; // Half a pixel arc length in radians (2pi cancels out).
        int const segment_per_arc = ImMax(4, (int)wheel_r_outer / 12);
        for (int n = 0; n < 6; n++)
        {
            float const a0 = (n)     /6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI - aeps;
            float const a1 = (n+1.0f)/6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI + aeps;
            int const vert_start_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size;
            draw_list->PathArcTo(wheel_center, (wheel_r_inner + wheel_r_outer)*0.5f, a0, a1, segment_per_arc);
            draw_list->PathStroke(col_white, false, wheel_thickness);
            int const vert_end_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size;

            // Paint colors over existing vertices
            ImVec2 gradient_p0(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a0) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a0) * wheel_r_inner);
            ImVec2 gradient_p1(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a1) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a1) * wheel_r_inner);
            ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(draw_list, vert_start_idx, vert_end_idx, gradient_p0, gradient_p1, col_hues[n], col_hues[n+1]);
        }

        // Render Cursor + preview on Hue Wheel
        float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
        float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
        ImVec2 hue_cursor_pos(wheel_center.x + cos_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner+wheel_r_outer)*0.5f, wheel_center.y + sin_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner+wheel_r_outer)*0.5f);
        float hue_cursor_rad = value_changed_h ? wheel_thickness * 0.65f : wheel_thickness * 0.55f;
        int hue_cursor_segments = ImClamp((int)(hue_cursor_rad / 1.4f), 9, 32);
        draw_list->AddCircleFilled(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, hue_color32, hue_cursor_segments);
        draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad+1, col_midgrey, hue_cursor_segments);
        draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, col_white, hue_cursor_segments);

        // Render SV triangle (rotated according to hue)
        ImVec2 tra = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pa, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
        ImVec2 trb = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pb, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
        ImVec2 trc = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pc, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
        ImVec2 uv_white = GetFontTexUvWhitePixel();
        draw_list->PrimReserve(6, 6);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(tra, uv_white, hue_color32);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(trb, uv_white, hue_color32);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(trc, uv_white, col_white);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(tra, uv_white, 0);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(trb, uv_white, col_black);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(trc, uv_white, 0);
        draw_list->AddTriangle(tra, trb, trc, col_midgrey, 1.5f);
        sv_cursor_pos = ImLerp(ImLerp(trc, tra, ImSaturate(S)), trb, ImSaturate(1 - V));
    }
    else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar)
    {
        // Render SV Square
        draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size), col_white, hue_color32, hue_color32, col_white);
        draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size), 0, 0, col_black, col_black);
        RenderFrameBorder(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size), 0.0f);
        sv_cursor_pos.x = ImClamp(IM_ROUND(picker_pos.x + ImSaturate(S)     * sv_picker_size), picker_pos.x + 2, picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size - 2); // Sneakily prevent the circle to stick out too much
        sv_cursor_pos.y = ImClamp(IM_ROUND(picker_pos.y + ImSaturate(1 - V) * sv_picker_size), picker_pos.y + 2, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size - 2);

        // Render Hue Bar
        for (int i = 0; i < 6; ++i)
            draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y + i * (sv_picker_size / 6)), ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + (i + 1) * (sv_picker_size / 6)), col_hues[i], col_hues[i], col_hues[i + 1], col_hues[i + 1]);
        float bar0_line_y = IM_ROUND(picker_pos.y + H * sv_picker_size);
        RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y), ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size), 0.0f);
        RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list, ImVec2(bar0_pos_x - 1, bar0_line_y), ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz), bars_width + 2.0f, style.Alpha);
    }

    // Render cursor/preview circle (clamp S/V within 0..1 range because floating points colors may lead HSV values to be out of range)
    float sv_cursor_rad = value_changed_sv ? 10.0f : 6.0f;
    draw_list->AddCircleFilled(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, user_col32_striped_of_alpha, 12);
    draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad+1, col_midgrey, 12);
    draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, col_white, 12);

    // Render alpha bar
    if (alpha_bar)
    {
        float alpha = ImSaturate(col[3]);
        ImRect bar1_bb(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y, bar1_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size);
        RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, 0, bar1_bb.GetWidth() / 2.0f, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
        draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, user_col32_striped_of_alpha, user_col32_striped_of_alpha, user_col32_striped_of_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK, user_col32_striped_of_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK);
        float bar1_line_y = IM_ROUND(picker_pos.y + (1.0f - alpha) * sv_picker_size);
        RenderFrameBorder(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, 0.0f);
        RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list, ImVec2(bar1_pos_x - 1, bar1_line_y), ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz), bars_width + 2.0f, style.Alpha);
    }

    EndGroup();

    if (value_changed && memcmp(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float)) == 0)
        value_changed = false;
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(window->DC.LastItemId);

    PopID();

    return value_changed;
}

// A little colored square. Return true when clicked.
// FIXME: May want to display/ignore the alpha component in the color display? Yet show it in the tooltip.
// 'desc_id' is not called 'label' because we don't display it next to the button, but only in the tooltip.
// Note that 'col' may be encoded in HSV if ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV is set.
bool ImGui::ColorButton(char const* desc_id, const ImVec4& col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, ImVec2 size)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(desc_id);
    float default_size = GetFrameHeight();
    if (size.x == 0.0f)
        size.x = default_size;
    if (size.y == 0.0f)
        size.y = default_size;
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    ItemSize(bb, (size.y >= default_size) ? g.Style.FramePadding.y : 0.0f);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);

    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
        flags &= ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf);

    ImVec4 col_rgb = col;
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
        ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(col_rgb.x, col_rgb.y, col_rgb.z, col_rgb.x, col_rgb.y, col_rgb.z);

    ImVec4 col_rgb_without_alpha(col_rgb.x, col_rgb.y, col_rgb.z, 1.0f);
    float grid_step = ImMin(size.x, size.y) / 2.99f;
    float rounding = ImMin(g.Style.FrameRounding, grid_step * 0.5f);
    ImRect bb_inner = bb;
    float off = -0.75f; // The border (using Col_FrameBg) tends to look off when color is near-opaque and rounding is enabled. This offset seemed like a good middle ground to reduce those artifacts.
    bb_inner.Expand(off);
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf) && col_rgb.w < 1.0f)
    {
        float mid_x = IM_ROUND((bb_inner.Min.x + bb_inner.Max.x) * 0.5f);
        RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(ImVec2(bb_inner.Min.x + grid_step, bb_inner.Min.y), bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_rgb), grid_step, ImVec2(-grid_step + off, off), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight| ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight);
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min, ImVec2(mid_x, bb_inner.Max.y), GetColorU32(col_rgb_without_alpha), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft|ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft);
    }
    else
    {
        // Because GetColorU32() multiplies by the global style Alpha and we don't want to display a checkerboard if the source code had no alpha
        ImVec4 col_source = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview) ? col_rgb : col_rgb_without_alpha;
        if (col_source.w < 1.0f)
            RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), grid_step, ImVec2(off, off), rounding);
        else
            window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All);
    }
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
    if (g.Style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f)
        RenderFrameBorder(bb.Min, bb.Max, rounding);
    else
        window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), rounding); // Color button are often in need of some sort of border

    // Drag and Drop Source
    // NB: The ActiveId test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropSource() does the same test.
    if (g.ActiveId == id && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropSource())
    {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
            SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F, &col_rgb, sizeof(float) * 3, ImGuiCond_Once);
        else
            SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F, &col_rgb, sizeof(float) * 4, ImGuiCond_Once);
        ColorButton(desc_id, col, flags);
        SameLine();
        TextEx("Color");
        EndDragDropSource();
    }

    // Tooltip
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip) && hovered)
        ColorTooltip(desc_id, &col.x, flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf));

    return pressed;
}

// Initialize/override default color options
void ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask;
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask));    // Check only 1 option is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask));   // Check only 1 option is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask));     // Check only 1 option is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask));      // Check only 1 option is selected
    g.ColorEditOptions = flags;
}

// Note: only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
void ImGui::ColorTooltip(char const* text, float const* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    BeginTooltipEx(0, true);
    char const* text_end = text ? FindRenderedTextEnd(text, NULL) : text;
    if (text_end > text)
    {
        TextEx(text, text_end);
        Separator();
    }

    ImVec2 sz(g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2, g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
    ImVec4 cf(col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
    int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]), ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]);
    ColorButton("##preview", cf, (flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf)) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip, sz);
    SameLine();
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) || !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask))
    {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
            Text("#%02X%02X%02X\nR: %d, G: %d, B: %d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, cr, cg, cb, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
        else
            Text("#%02X%02X%02X%02X\nR:%d, G:%d, B:%d, A:%d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, ca, cr, cg, cb, ca, col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]);
    }
    else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
    {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
            Text("H: %.3f, S: %.3f, V: %.3f", col[0], col[1], col[2]);
        else
            Text("H: %.3f, S: %.3f, V: %.3f, A: %.3f", col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]);
    }
    EndTooltip();
}

void ImGui::ColorEditOptionsPopup(float const* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    bool allow_opt_inputs = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask);
    bool allow_opt_datatype = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask);
    if ((!allow_opt_inputs && !allow_opt_datatype) || !BeginPopup("context"))
        return;
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiColorEditFlags opts = g.ColorEditOptions;
    if (allow_opt_inputs)
    {
        if (RadioButton("RGB", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB;
        if (RadioButton("HSV", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV;
        if (RadioButton("Hex", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex;
    }
    if (allow_opt_datatype)
    {
        if (allow_opt_inputs) Separator();
        if (RadioButton("0..255",     (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8;
        if (RadioButton("0.00..1.00", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float;
    }

    if (allow_opt_inputs || allow_opt_datatype)
        Separator();
    if (Button("Copy as..", ImVec2(-1,0)))
        OpenPopup("Copy");
    if (BeginPopup("Copy"))
    {
        int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]), ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]);
        char buf[64];
        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff)", col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
        if (Selectable(buf))
            SetClipboardText(buf);
        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%d,%d,%d,%d)", cr, cg, cb, ca);
        if (Selectable(buf))
            SetClipboardText(buf);
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "0x%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb);
        else
            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "0x%02X%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb, ca);
        if (Selectable(buf))
            SetClipboardText(buf);
        EndPopup();
    }

    g.ColorEditOptions = opts;
    EndPopup();
}

void ImGui::ColorPickerOptionsPopup(float const* ref_col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    bool allow_opt_picker = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask);
    bool allow_opt_alpha_bar = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
    if ((!allow_opt_picker && !allow_opt_alpha_bar) || !BeginPopup("context"))
        return;
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (allow_opt_picker)
    {
        ImVec2 picker_size(g.FontSize * 8, ImMax(g.FontSize * 8 - (GetFrameHeight() + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x), 1.0f)); // FIXME: Picker size copied from main picker function
        PushItemWidth(picker_size.x);
        for (int picker_type = 0; picker_type < 2; picker_type++)
        {
            // Draw small/thumbnail version of each picker type (over an invisible button for selection)
            if (picker_type > 0) Separator();
            PushID(picker_type);
            ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview|(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
            if (picker_type == 0) picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar;
            if (picker_type == 1) picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel;
            ImVec2 backup_pos = GetCursorScreenPos();
            if (Selectable("##selectable", false, 0, picker_size)) // By default, Selectable() is closing popup
                g.ColorEditOptions = (g.ColorEditOptions & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask) | (picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask);
            SetCursorScreenPos(backup_pos);
            ImVec4 dummy_ref_col;
            memcpy(&dummy_ref_col, ref_col, sizeof(float) * ((picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 3 : 4));
            ColorPicker4("##dummypicker", &dummy_ref_col.x, picker_flags);
            PopID();
        }
        PopItemWidth();
    }
    if (allow_opt_alpha_bar)
    {
        if (allow_opt_picker) Separator();
        CheckboxFlags("Alpha Bar", (unsigned int*)&g.ColorEditOptions, ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
    }
    EndPopup();
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: TreeNode, CollapsingHeader, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - TreeNode()
// - TreeNodeV()
// - TreeNodeEx()
// - TreeNodeExV()
// - TreeNodeBehavior() [Internal]
// - TreePush()
// - TreePop()
// - GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()
// - SetNextItemOpen()
// - CollapsingHeader()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

bool ImGui::TreeNode(char const* str_id, char const* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNode(const void* ptr_id, char const* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNode(char const* label)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;
    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), 0, label, NULL);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(char const* str_id, char const* fmt, va_list args)
{
    return TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(const void* ptr_id, char const* fmt, va_list args)
{
    return TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(char const* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags, label, NULL);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(char const* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, char const* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, flags, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, char const* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, flags, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(char const* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, char const* fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    char const* label_end = g.TempBuffer + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(str_id), flags, g.TempBuffer, label_end);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, char const* fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    char const* label_end = g.TempBuffer + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(ptr_id), flags, g.TempBuffer, label_end);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehaviorIsOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf)
        return true;

    // We only write to the tree storage if the user clicks (or explicitly use the SetNextItemOpen function)
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    ImGuiStorage* storage = window->DC.StateStorage;

    bool is_open;
    if (g.NextItemData.Flags & ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasOpen)
    {
        if (g.NextItemData.OpenCond & ImGuiCond_Always)
        {
            is_open = g.NextItemData.OpenVal;
            storage->SetInt(id, is_open);
        }
        else
        {
            // We treat ImGuiCond_Once and ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver the same because tree node state are not saved persistently.
            int const stored_value = storage->GetInt(id, -1);
            if (stored_value == -1)
            {
                is_open = g.NextItemData.OpenVal;
                storage->SetInt(id, is_open);
            }
            else
            {
                is_open = stored_value != 0;
            }
        }
    }
    else
    {
        is_open = storage->GetInt(id, (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen) ? 1 : 0) != 0;
    }

    // When logging is enabled, we automatically expand tree nodes (but *NOT* collapsing headers.. seems like sensible behavior).
    // NB- If we are above max depth we still allow manually opened nodes to be logged.
    if (g.LogEnabled && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog) && (window->DC.TreeDepth - g.LogDepthRef) < g.LogDepthToExpand)
        is_open = true;

    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, char const* label, char const* label_end)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    bool const display_frame = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed) != 0;
    const ImVec2 padding = (display_frame || (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_FramePadding)) ? style.FramePadding : ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset, style.FramePadding.y));

    if (!label_end)
        label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, label_end, false);

    // We vertically grow up to current line height up the typical widget height.
    float const frame_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y*2), label_size.y + padding.y*2);
    ImRect frame_bb;
    frame_bb.Min.x = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth) ? window->WorkRect.Min.x : window->DC.CursorPos.x;
    frame_bb.Min.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
    frame_bb.Max.x = window->WorkRect.Max.x;
    frame_bb.Max.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y + frame_height;
    if (display_frame)
    {
        // Framed header expand a little outside the default padding, to the edge of InnerClipRect
        // (FIXME: May remove this at some point and make InnerClipRect align with WindowPadding.x instead of WindowPadding.x*0.5f)
        frame_bb.Min.x -= IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f - 1.0f);
        frame_bb.Max.x += IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
    }

    float const text_offset_x = g.FontSize + (display_frame ? padding.x*3 : padding.x*2);               // Collapser arrow width + Spacing
    float const text_offset_y = ImMax(padding.y, window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);                    // Latch before ItemSize changes it
    float const text_width = g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.x + padding.x*2 : 0.0f);    // Include collapser
    ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + text_offset_x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + text_offset_y);
    ItemSize(ImVec2(text_width, frame_height), padding.y);

    // For regular tree nodes, we arbitrary allow to click past 2 worth of ItemSpacing
    ImRect interact_bb = frame_bb;
    if (!display_frame && (flags & (ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth)) == 0)
        interact_bb.Max.x = frame_bb.Min.x + text_width + style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f;

    // Store a flag for the current depth to tell if we will allow closing this node when navigating one of its child.
    // For this purpose we essentially compare if g.NavIdIsAlive went from 0 to 1 between TreeNode() and TreePop().
    // This is currently only support 32 level deep and we are fine with (1 << Depth) overflowing into a zero.
    bool const is_leaf = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf) != 0;
    bool is_open = TreeNodeBehaviorIsOpen(id, flags);
    if (is_open && !g.NavIdIsAlive && (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere) && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
        window->DC.TreeMayJumpToParentOnPopMask |= (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth);

    bool item_add = ItemAdd(interact_bb, id);
    window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect;
    window->DC.LastItemDisplayRect = frame_bb;

    if (!item_add)
    {
        if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
            TreePushOverrideID(id);
        IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(window->DC.LastItemId, label, window->DC.ItemFlags | (is_leaf ? 0 : ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable) | (is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));
        return is_open;
    }

    // Flags that affects opening behavior:
    // - 0 (default) .................... single-click anywhere to open
    // - OpenOnDoubleClick .............. double-click anywhere to open
    // - OpenOnArrow .................... single-click on arrow to open
    // - OpenOnDoubleClick|OpenOnArrow .. single-click on arrow or double-click anywhere to open
    ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = 0;
    if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap)
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap;
    if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick | ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow) ? ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease : 0);
    if (!is_leaf)
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold;

    // We allow clicking on the arrow section with keyboard modifiers held, in order to easily 
    // allow browsing a tree while preserving selection with code implementing multi-selection patterns.
    // When clicking on the rest of the tree node we always disallow keyboard modifiers.
    float const hit_padding_x = style.TouchExtraPadding.x;
    float const arrow_hit_x1 = (text_pos.x - text_offset_x) - hit_padding_x;
    float const arrow_hit_x2 = (text_pos.x - text_offset_x) + (g.FontSize + padding.x * 2.0f) + hit_padding_x;
    if (window != g.HoveredWindow || !(g.IO.MousePos.x >= arrow_hit_x1 && g.IO.MousePos.x < arrow_hit_x2))
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers;
    
    bool selected = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected) != 0;
    bool const was_selected = selected;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(interact_bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
    if (!is_leaf)
    {
        bool toggled = false;
        if (pressed)
        {
            if ((flags & (ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)) == 0 || (g.NavActivateId == id))
                toggled = true;
            if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow)
                toggled |= (g.IO.MousePos.x >= arrow_hit_x1 && g.IO.MousePos.x < arrow_hit_x2) && (!g.NavDisableMouseHover); // Lightweight equivalent of IsMouseHoveringRect() since ButtonBehavior() already did the job
            if ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0])
                toggled = true;
            if (g.DragDropActive && is_open) // When using Drag and Drop "hold to open" we keep the node highlighted after opening, but never close it again.
                toggled = false;
        }

        if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && is_open)
        {
            toggled = true;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
        if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && !is_open) // If there's something upcoming on the line we may want to give it the priority?
        {
            toggled = true;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }

        if (toggled)
        {
            is_open = !is_open;
            window->DC.StateStorage->SetInt(id, is_open);
            window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledOpen;
        }
    }
    if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap)
        SetItemAllowOverlap();

    // In this branch, TreeNodeBehavior() cannot toggle the selection so this will never trigger.
    if (selected != was_selected) //-V547
        window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledSelection;

    // Render
    const ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    ImGuiNavHighlightFlags nav_highlight_flags = ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin;
    if (display_frame)
    {
        // Framed type
        const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
        RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, bg_col, true, style.FrameRounding);
        RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, nav_highlight_flags);
        if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet)
            RenderBullet(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x * 0.60f, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.5f), text_col);
        else if (!is_leaf)
            RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x + padding.x, text_pos.y), text_col, is_open ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Right, 1.0f);
        else // Leaf without bullet, left-adjusted text
            text_pos.x -= text_offset_x;
        if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ClipLabelForTrailingButton)
            frame_bb.Max.x -= g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x;
        if (g.LogEnabled)
        {
            // NB: '##' is normally used to hide text (as a library-wide feature), so we need to specify the text range to make sure the ## aren't stripped out here.
            char const log_prefix[] = "\n##";
            char const log_suffix[] = "##";
            LogRenderedText(&text_pos, log_prefix, log_prefix+3);
            RenderTextClipped(text_pos, frame_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size);
            LogRenderedText(&text_pos, log_suffix, log_suffix+2);
        }
        else
        {
            RenderTextClipped(text_pos, frame_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size);
        }
    }
    else
    {
        // Unframed typed for tree nodes
        if (hovered || selected)
        {
            const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
            RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, bg_col, false);
            RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, nav_highlight_flags);
        }
        if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet)
            RenderBullet(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x * 0.5f, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.5f), text_col);
        else if (!is_leaf)
            RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x + padding.x, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.15f), text_col, is_open ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Right, 0.70f);
        if (g.LogEnabled)
            LogRenderedText(&text_pos, ">");
        RenderText(text_pos, label, label_end, false);
    }

    if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
        TreePushOverrideID(id);
    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags | (is_leaf ? 0 : ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable) | (is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));
    return is_open;
}

void ImGui::TreePush(char const* str_id)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    Indent();
    window->DC.TreeDepth++;
    PushID(str_id ? str_id : "#TreePush");
}

void ImGui::TreePush(const void* ptr_id)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    Indent();
    window->DC.TreeDepth++;
    PushID(ptr_id ? ptr_id : (const void*)"#TreePush");
}

void ImGui::TreePushOverrideID(ImGuiID id)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    Indent();
    window->DC.TreeDepth++;
    window->IDStack.push_back(id);
}

void ImGui::TreePop()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    Unindent();

    window->DC.TreeDepth--;
    ImU32 tree_depth_mask = (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth);

    // Handle Left arrow to move to parent tree node (when ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere is enabled)
    if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && g.NavWindow == window && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet())
        if (g.NavIdIsAlive && (window->DC.TreeMayJumpToParentOnPopMask & tree_depth_mask))
        {
            SetNavID(window->IDStack.back(), g.NavLayer);
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
    window->DC.TreeMayJumpToParentOnPopMask &= tree_depth_mask - 1;

    IM_ASSERT(window->IDStack.Size > 1); // There should always be 1 element in the IDStack (pushed during window creation). If this triggers you called TreePop/PopID too much.
    PopID();
}

// Horizontal distance preceding label when using TreeNode() or Bullet()
float ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.FontSize + (g.Style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f);
}

// Set next TreeNode/CollapsingHeader open state.
void ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(bool is_open, ImGuiCond cond)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.CurrentWindow->SkipItems)
        return;
    g.NextItemData.Flags |= ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasOpen;
    g.NextItemData.OpenVal = is_open;
    g.NextItemData.OpenCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
}

// CollapsingHeader returns true when opened but do not indent nor push into the ID stack (because of the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen flag).
// This is basically the same as calling TreeNodeEx(label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader). You can remove the _NoTreePushOnOpen flag if you want behavior closer to normal TreeNode().
bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(char const* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader, label);
}

bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(char const* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    if (p_open && !*p_open)
        return false;

    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    flags |= ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader | (p_open ? ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ClipLabelForTrailingButton : 0);
    bool is_open = TreeNodeBehavior(id, flags, label);
    if (p_open)
    {
        // Create a small overlapping close button
        // FIXME: We can evolve this into user accessible helpers to add extra buttons on title bars, headers, etc.
        // FIXME: CloseButton can overlap into text, need find a way to clip the text somehow.
        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
        ImGuiItemHoveredDataBackup last_item_backup;
        float button_size = g.FontSize;
        float button_x = ImMax(window->DC.LastItemRect.Min.x, window->DC.LastItemRect.Max.x - g.Style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f - button_size);
        float button_y = window->DC.LastItemRect.Min.y;
        if (CloseButton(window->GetID((void*)((intptr_t)id + 1)), ImVec2(button_x, button_y)))
            *p_open = false;
        last_item_backup.Restore();
    }

    return is_open;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Selectable
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - Selectable()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Tip: pass a non-visible label (e.g. "##dummy") then you can use the space to draw other text or image.
// But you need to make sure the ID is unique, e.g. enclose calls in PushID/PopID or use ##unique_id.
bool ImGui::Selectable(char const* label, bool selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) && window->DC.CurrentColumns) // FIXME-OPT: Avoid if vertically clipped.
        PushColumnsBackground();

    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    ImVec2 size(size_arg.x != 0.0f ? size_arg.x : label_size.x, size_arg.y != 0.0f ? size_arg.y : label_size.y);
    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    pos.y += window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset;
    ImRect bb_inner(pos, pos + size);
    ItemSize(size, 0.0f);

    // Fill horizontal space.
    ImVec2 window_padding = window->WindowPadding;
    float max_x = (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) ? GetWindowContentRegionMax().x : GetContentRegionMax().x;
    float w_draw = ImMax(label_size.x, window->Pos.x + max_x - window_padding.x - pos.x);
    ImVec2 size_draw((size_arg.x != 0 && !(flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth)) ? size_arg.x : w_draw, size_arg.y != 0.0f ? size_arg.y : size.y);
    ImRect bb(pos, pos + size_draw);
    if (size_arg.x == 0.0f || (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth))
        bb.Max.x += window_padding.x;

    // Selectables are tightly packed together so we extend the box to cover spacing between selectable.
    float const spacing_x = style.ItemSpacing.x;
    float const spacing_y = style.ItemSpacing.y;
    float const spacing_L = IM_FLOOR(spacing_x * 0.50f);
    float const spacing_U = IM_FLOOR(spacing_y * 0.50f);
    bb.Min.x -= spacing_L;
    bb.Min.y -= spacing_U;
    bb.Max.x += (spacing_x - spacing_L);
    bb.Max.y += (spacing_y - spacing_U);

    bool item_add;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled)
    {
        ImGuiItemFlags backup_item_flags = window->DC.ItemFlags;
        window->DC.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus;
        item_add = ItemAdd(bb, id);
        window->DC.ItemFlags = backup_item_flags;
    }
    else
    {
        item_add = ItemAdd(bb, id);
    }
    if (!item_add)
    {
        if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) && window->DC.CurrentColumns)
            PopColumnsBackground();
        return false;
    }

    // We use NoHoldingActiveID on menus so user can click and _hold_ on a menu then drag to browse child entries
    ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = 0;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveID;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnRelease) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Disabled;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowItemOverlap) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap;

    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled)
        selected = false;

    bool const was_selected = selected;
    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);

    // Update NavId when clicking or when Hovering (this doesn't happen on most widgets), so navigation can be resumed with gamepad/keyboard
    if (pressed || (hovered && (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover)))
    {
        if (!g.NavDisableMouseHover && g.NavWindow == window && g.NavLayer == window->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
        {
            g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
            SetNavID(id, window->DC.NavLayerCurrent);
        }
    }
    if (pressed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowItemOverlap)
        SetItemAllowOverlap();

    // In this branch, Selectable() cannot toggle the selection so this will never trigger.
    if (selected != was_selected) //-V547
        window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledSelection;

    // Render
    if (held && (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawHoveredWhenHeld))
        hovered = true;
    if (hovered || selected)
    {
        const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
        RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, false, 0.0f);
        RenderNavHighlight(bb, id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin | ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding);
    }

    if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) && window->DC.CurrentColumns)
    {
        PopColumnsBackground();
        bb.Max.x -= (GetContentRegionMax().x - max_x);
    }

    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
    RenderTextClipped(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, label, NULL, &label_size, style.SelectableTextAlign, &bb);
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) PopStyleColor();

    // Automatically close popups
    if (pressed && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups) && !(window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_SelectableDontClosePopup))
        CloseCurrentPopup();

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags);
    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::Selectable(char const* label, bool* p_selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg)
{
    if (Selectable(label, *p_selected, flags, size_arg))
    {
        *p_selected = !*p_selected;
        return true;
    }
    return false;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: ListBox
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - ListBox()
// - ListBoxHeader()
// - ListBoxFooter()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// FIXME: This is an old API. We should redesign some of it, rename ListBoxHeader->BeginListBox, ListBoxFooter->EndListBox
// and promote using them over existing ListBox() functions, similarly to change with combo boxes.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// FIXME: In principle this function should be called BeginListBox(). We should rename it after re-evaluating if we want to keep the same signature.
// Helper to calculate the size of a listbox and display a label on the right.
// Tip: To have a list filling the entire window width, PushItemWidth(-1) and pass an non-visible label e.g. "##empty"
bool ImGui::ListBoxHeader(char const* label, const ImVec2& size_arg)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    // Size default to hold ~7 items. Fractional number of items helps seeing that we can scroll down/up without looking at scrollbar.
    ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 7.4f + style.ItemSpacing.y);
    ImVec2 frame_size = ImVec2(size.x, ImMax(size.y, label_size.y));
    ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
    ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
    window->DC.LastItemRect = bb; // Forward storage for ListBoxFooter.. dodgy.
    g.NextItemData.ClearFlags();

    if (!IsRectVisible(bb.Min, bb.Max))
    {
        ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), style.FramePadding.y);
        ItemAdd(bb, 0, &frame_bb);
        return false;
    }

    BeginGroup();
    if (label_size.x > 0)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    BeginChildFrame(id, frame_bb.GetSize());
    return true;
}

// FIXME: In principle this function should be called EndListBox(). We should rename it after re-evaluating if we want to keep the same signature.
bool ImGui::ListBoxHeader(char const* label, int items_count, int height_in_items)
{
    // Size default to hold ~7.25 items.
    // We add +25% worth of item height to allow the user to see at a glance if there are more items up/down, without looking at the scrollbar.
    // We don't add this extra bit if items_count <= height_in_items. It is slightly dodgy, because it means a dynamic list of items will make the widget resize occasionally when it crosses that size.
    // I am expecting that someone will come and complain about this behavior in a remote future, then we can advise on a better solution.
    if (height_in_items < 0)
        height_in_items = ImMin(items_count, 7);
    const ImGuiStyle& style = GetStyle();
    float height_in_items_f = (height_in_items < items_count) ? (height_in_items + 0.25f) : (height_in_items + 0.00f);

    // We include ItemSpacing.y so that a list sized for the exact number of items doesn't make a scrollbar appears. We could also enforce that by passing a flag to BeginChild().
    ImVec2 size;
    size.x = 0.0f;
    size.y = ImFloor(GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * height_in_items_f + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
    return ListBoxHeader(label, size);
}

// FIXME: In principle this function should be called EndListBox(). We should rename it after re-evaluating if we want to keep the same signature.
void ImGui::ListBoxFooter()
{
    ImGuiWindow* parent_window = GetCurrentWindow()->ParentWindow;
    const ImRect bb = parent_window->DC.LastItemRect;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = GetStyle();

    EndChildFrame();

    // Redeclare item size so that it includes the label (we have stored the full size in LastItemRect)
    // We call SameLine() to restore DC.CurrentLine* data
    SameLine();
    parent_window->DC.CursorPos = bb.Min;
    ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    EndGroup();
}

bool ImGui::ListBox(char const* label, int* current_item, char const* const items[], int items_count, int height_items)
{
    bool const value_changed = ListBox(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void*)items, items_count, height_items);
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::ListBox(char const* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, char const**), void* data, int items_count, int height_in_items)
{
    if (!ListBoxHeader(label, items_count, height_in_items))
        return false;

    // Assume all items have even height (= 1 line of text). If you need items of different or variable sizes you can create a custom version of ListBox() in your code without using the clipper.
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    bool value_changed = false;
    ImGuiListClipper clipper(items_count, GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()); // We know exactly our line height here so we pass it as a minor optimization, but generally you don't need to.
    while (clipper.Step())
        for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
        {
            bool const item_selected = (i == *current_item);
            char const* item_text;
            if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
                item_text = "*Unknown item*";

            PushID(i);
            if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected))
            {
                *current_item = i;
                value_changed = true;
            }
            if (item_selected)
                SetItemDefaultFocus();
            PopID();
        }
    ListBoxFooter();
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId);

    return value_changed;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: PlotLines, PlotHistogram
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - PlotEx() [Internal]
// - PlotLines()
// - PlotHistogram()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

void ImGui::PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType plot_type, char const* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, char const* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 frame_size)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    if (frame_size.x == 0.0f)
        frame_size.x = CalcItemWidth();
    if (frame_size.y == 0.0f)
        frame_size.y = label_size.y + (style.FramePadding.y * 2);

    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
    const ImRect inner_bb(frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, frame_bb.Max - style.FramePadding);
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0));
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, 0, &frame_bb))
        return;
    bool const hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);

    // Determine scale from values if not specified
    if (scale_min == FLT_MAX || scale_max == FLT_MAX)
    {
        float v_min = FLT_MAX;
        float v_max = -FLT_MAX;
        for (int i = 0; i < values_count; i++)
        {
            float const v = values_getter(data, i);
            if (v != v) // Ignore NaN values
                continue;
            v_min = ImMin(v_min, v);
            v_max = ImMax(v_max, v);
        }
        if (scale_min == FLT_MAX)
            scale_min = v_min;
        if (scale_max == FLT_MAX)
            scale_max = v_max;
    }

    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);

    int const values_count_min = (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? 2 : 1;
    if (values_count >= values_count_min)
    {
        int res_w = ImMin((int)frame_size.x, values_count) + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0);
        int item_count = values_count + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0);

        // Tooltip on hover
        int v_hovered = -1;
        if (hovered && inner_bb.Contains(g.IO.MousePos))
        {
            float const t = ImClamp((g.IO.MousePos.x - inner_bb.Min.x) / (inner_bb.Max.x - inner_bb.Min.x), 0.0f, 0.9999f);
            int const v_idx = (int)(t * item_count);
            IM_ASSERT(v_idx >= 0 && v_idx < values_count);

            float const v0 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + values_offset) % values_count);
            float const v1 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + 1 + values_offset) % values_count);
            if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines)
                SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g\n%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0, v_idx+1, v1);
            else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram)
                SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0);
            v_hovered = v_idx;
        }

        float const t_step = 1.0f / (float)res_w;
        float const inv_scale = (scale_min == scale_max) ? 0.0f : (1.0f / (scale_max - scale_min));

        float v0 = values_getter(data, (0 + values_offset) % values_count);
        float t0 = 0.0f;
        ImVec2 tp0 = ImVec2( t0, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v0 - scale_min) * inv_scale) );                       // Point in the normalized space of our target rectangle
        float histogram_zero_line_t = (scale_min * scale_max < 0.0f) ? (-scale_min * inv_scale) : (scale_min < 0.0f ? 0.0f : 1.0f);   // Where does the zero line stands

        const ImU32 col_base = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLines : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram);
        const ImU32 col_hovered = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered);

        for (int n = 0; n < res_w; n++)
        {
            float const t1 = t0 + t_step;
            int const v1_idx = (int)(t0 * item_count + 0.5f);
            IM_ASSERT(v1_idx >= 0 && v1_idx < values_count);
            float const v1 = values_getter(data, (v1_idx + values_offset + 1) % values_count);
            const ImVec2 tp1 = ImVec2( t1, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v1 - scale_min) * inv_scale) );

            // NB: Draw calls are merged together by the DrawList system. Still, we should render our batch are lower level to save a bit of CPU.
            ImVec2 pos0 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, tp0);
            ImVec2 pos1 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? tp1 : ImVec2(tp1.x, histogram_zero_line_t));
            if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines)
            {
                window->DrawList->AddLine(pos0, pos1, v_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base);
            }
            else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram)
            {
                if (pos1.x >= pos0.x + 2.0f)
                    pos1.x -= 1.0f;
                window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(pos0, pos1, v_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base);
            }

            t0 = t1;
            tp0 = tp1;
        }
    }

    // Text overlay
    if (overlay_text)
        RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, overlay_text, NULL, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f,0.0f));

    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, inner_bb.Min.y), label);
}

struct ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData
{
    float const* Values;
    int Stride;

    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData(float const* values, int stride) { Values = values; Stride = stride; }
};

static float Plot_ArrayGetter(void* data, int idx)
{
    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData* plot_data = (ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData*)data;
    float const v = *(float const*)(const void*)((const unsigned char*)plot_data->Values + (size_t)idx * plot_data->Stride);
    return v;
}

void ImGui::PlotLines(char const* label, float const* values, int values_count, int values_offset, char const* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size, int stride)
{
    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride);
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void*)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

void ImGui::PlotLines(char const* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, char const* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size)
{
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

void ImGui::PlotHistogram(char const* label, float const* values, int values_count, int values_offset, char const* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size, int stride)
{
    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride);
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void*)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

void ImGui::PlotHistogram(char const* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, char const* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size)
{
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Value helpers
// Those is not very useful, legacy API.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - Value()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

void ImGui::Value(char const* prefix, bool b)
{
    Text("%s: %s", prefix, (b ? "true" : "false"));
}

void ImGui::Value(char const* prefix, int v)
{
    Text("%s: %d", prefix, v);
}

void ImGui::Value(char const* prefix, unsigned int v)
{
    Text("%s: %d", prefix, v);
}

void ImGui::Value(char const* prefix, float v, char const* float_format)
{
    if (float_format)
    {
        char fmt[64];
        ImFormatString(fmt, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt), "%%s: %s", float_format);
        Text(fmt, prefix, v);
    }
    else
    {
        Text("%s: %.3f", prefix, v);
    }
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] MenuItem, BeginMenu, EndMenu, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - ImGuiMenuColumns [Internal]
// - BeginMenuBar()
// - EndMenuBar()
// - BeginMainMenuBar()
// - EndMainMenuBar()
// - BeginMenu()
// - EndMenu()
// - MenuItem()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Helpers for internal use
ImGuiMenuColumns::ImGuiMenuColumns()
{
    Spacing = Width = NextWidth = 0.0f;
    memset(Pos, 0, sizeof(Pos));
    memset(NextWidths, 0, sizeof(NextWidths));
}

void ImGuiMenuColumns::Update(int count, float spacing, bool clear)
{
    IM_ASSERT(count == IM_ARRAYSIZE(Pos));
    IM_UNUSED(count);
    Width = NextWidth = 0.0f;
    Spacing = spacing;
    if (clear)
        memset(NextWidths, 0, sizeof(NextWidths));
    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Pos); i++)
    {
        if (i > 0 && NextWidths[i] > 0.0f)
            Width += Spacing;
        Pos[i] = IM_FLOOR(Width);
        Width += NextWidths[i];
        NextWidths[i] = 0.0f;
    }
}

float ImGuiMenuColumns::DeclColumns(float w0, float w1, float w2) // not using va_arg because they promote float to double
{
    NextWidth = 0.0f;
    NextWidths[0] = ImMax(NextWidths[0], w0);
    NextWidths[1] = ImMax(NextWidths[1], w1);
    NextWidths[2] = ImMax(NextWidths[2], w2);
    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Pos); i++)
        NextWidth += NextWidths[i] + ((i > 0 && NextWidths[i] > 0.0f) ? Spacing : 0.0f);
    return ImMax(Width, NextWidth);
}

float ImGuiMenuColumns::CalcExtraSpace(float avail_w) const
{
    return ImMax(0.0f, avail_w - Width);
}

// FIXME: Provided a rectangle perhaps e.g. a BeginMenuBarEx() could be used anywhere..
// Currently the main responsibility of this function being to setup clip-rect + horizontal layout + menu navigation layer.
// Ideally we also want this to be responsible for claiming space out of the main window scrolling rectangle, in which case ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar will become unnecessary.
// Then later the same system could be used for multiple menu-bars, scrollbars, side-bars.
bool ImGui::BeginMenuBar()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;
    if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
        return false;

    IM_ASSERT(!window->DC.MenuBarAppending);
    BeginGroup(); // Backup position on layer 0 // FIXME: Misleading to use a group for that backup/restore
    PushID("##menubar");

    // We don't clip with current window clipping rectangle as it is already set to the area below. However we clip with window full rect.
    // We remove 1 worth of rounding to Max.x to that text in long menus and small windows don't tend to display over the lower-right rounded area, which looks particularly glitchy.
    ImRect bar_rect = window->MenuBarRect();
    ImRect clip_rect(IM_ROUND(bar_rect.Min.x + window->WindowBorderSize), IM_ROUND(bar_rect.Min.y + window->WindowBorderSize), IM_ROUND(ImMax(bar_rect.Min.x, bar_rect.Max.x - ImMax(window->WindowRounding, window->WindowBorderSize))), IM_ROUND(bar_rect.Max.y));
    clip_rect.ClipWith(window->OuterRectClipped);
    PushClipRect(clip_rect.Min, clip_rect.Max, false);

    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(bar_rect.Min.x + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x, bar_rect.Min.y + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.y);
    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal;
    window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
    window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask = (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Menu);
    window->DC.MenuBarAppending = true;
    AlignTextToFramePadding();
    return true;
}

void ImGui::EndMenuBar()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    // Nav: When a move request within one of our child menu failed, capture the request to navigate among our siblings.
    if (NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right) && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
    {
        ImGuiWindow* nav_earliest_child = g.NavWindow;
        while (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow && (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
            nav_earliest_child = nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow;
        if (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow == window && nav_earliest_child->DC.ParentLayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal && g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_None)
        {
            // To do so we claim focus back, restore NavId and then process the movement request for yet another frame.
            // This involve a one-frame delay which isn't very problematic in this situation. We could remove it by scoring in advance for multiple window (probably not worth the hassle/cost)
            const ImGuiNavLayer layer = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
            IM_ASSERT(window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext & (1 << layer)); // Sanity check
            FocusWindow(window);
            SetNavIDWithRectRel(window->NavLastIds[layer], layer, window->NavRectRel[layer]);
            g.NavLayer = layer;
            g.NavDisableHighlight = true; // Hide highlight for the current frame so we don't see the intermediary selection.
            g.NavMoveRequestForward = ImGuiNavForward_ForwardQueued;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
    }

    IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar);
    IM_ASSERT(window->DC.MenuBarAppending);
    PopClipRect();
    PopID();
    window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->MenuBarRect().Min.x; // Save horizontal position so next append can reuse it. This is kinda equivalent to a per-layer CursorPos.
    window->DC.GroupStack.back().EmitItem = false;
    EndGroup(); // Restore position on layer 0
    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
    window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
    window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask = (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Main);
    window->DC.MenuBarAppending = false;
}

// For the main menu bar, which cannot be moved, we honor g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding to ensure text can be visible on a TV set.
bool ImGui::BeginMainMenuBar()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiViewport* viewport = g.Viewports[0];
    g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.x, ImMax(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.y - g.Style.FramePadding.y, 0.0f));
    SetNextWindowPos(viewport->Pos);
    SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(viewport->Size.x, g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal.y + g.FontBaseSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y));
    SetNextWindowViewport(viewport->ID); // Enforce viewport so we don't create our onw viewport when ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsNoMerge is set.
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding, 0.0f);
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize, ImVec2(0, 0));
    ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar;
    bool is_open = Begin("##MainMenuBar", NULL, window_flags) && BeginMenuBar();
    PopStyleVar(2);
    g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    if (!is_open)
    {
        End();
        return false;
    }
    return true; //-V1020
}

void ImGui::EndMainMenuBar()
{
    EndMenuBar();

    // When the user has left the menu layer (typically: closed menus through activation of an item), we restore focus to the previous window
    // FIXME: With this strategy we won't be able to restore a NULL focus.
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.CurrentWindow == g.NavWindow && g.NavLayer == 0 && !g.NavAnyRequest)
        FocusTopMostWindowUnderOne(g.NavWindow, NULL);

    End();
}

bool ImGui::BeginMenu(char const* label, bool enabled)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);

    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    bool pressed;
    bool menu_is_open = IsPopupOpen(id);
    bool menuset_is_open = !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && (g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size].OpenParentId == window->IDStack.back());
    ImGuiWindow* backed_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
    if (menuset_is_open)
        g.NavWindow = window;  // Odd hack to allow hovering across menus of a same menu-set (otherwise we wouldn't be able to hover parent)

    // The reference position stored in popup_pos will be used by Begin() to find a suitable position for the child menu,
    // However the position is going to be different! It is choosen by FindBestWindowPosForPopup().
    // e.g. Menus tend to overlap each other horizontally to amplify relative Z-ordering.
    ImVec2 popup_pos, pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal)
    {
        // Menu inside an horizontal menu bar
        // Selectable extend their highlight by half ItemSpacing in each direction.
        // For ChildMenu, the popup position will be overwritten by the call to FindBestWindowPosForPopup() in Begin()
        popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x - 1.0f - IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f), pos.y - style.FramePadding.y + window->MenuBarHeight());
        window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f, style.ItemSpacing.y));
        float w = label_size.x;
        pressed = Selectable(label, menu_is_open, ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID | ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups | (!enabled ? ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled : 0), ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
        PopStyleVar();
        window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
    }
    else
    {
        // Menu inside a menu
        popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x, pos.y - style.WindowPadding.y);
        float w = window->MenuColumns.DeclColumns(label_size.x, 0.0f, IM_FLOOR(g.FontSize * 1.20f)); // Feedback to next frame
        float extra_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - w);
        pressed = Selectable(label, menu_is_open, ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID | ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth | (!enabled ? ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled : 0), ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
        ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(enabled ? ImGuiCol_Text : ImGuiCol_TextDisabled);
        RenderArrow(window->DrawList, pos + ImVec2(window->MenuColumns.Pos[2] + extra_w + g.FontSize * 0.30f, 0.0f), text_col, ImGuiDir_Right);
    }

    bool const hovered = enabled && ItemHoverable(window->DC.LastItemRect, id);
    if (menuset_is_open)
        g.NavWindow = backed_nav_window;

    bool want_open = false;
    bool want_close = false;
    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical) // (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
    {
        // Close menu when not hovering it anymore unless we are moving roughly in the direction of the menu
        // Implement http://bjk5.com/post/44698559168/breaking-down-amazons-mega-dropdown to avoid using timers, so menus feels more reactive.
        bool moving_toward_other_child_menu = false;

        ImGuiWindow* child_menu_window = (g.BeginPopupStack.Size < g.OpenPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size].SourceWindow == window) ? g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size].Window : NULL;
        if (g.HoveredWindow == window && child_menu_window != NULL && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
        {
            // FIXME-DPI: Values should be derived from a master "scale" factor.
            ImRect next_window_rect = child_menu_window->Rect();
            ImVec2 ta = g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseDelta;
            ImVec2 tb = (window->Pos.x < child_menu_window->Pos.x) ? next_window_rect.GetTL() : next_window_rect.GetTR();
            ImVec2 tc = (window->Pos.x < child_menu_window->Pos.x) ? next_window_rect.GetBL() : next_window_rect.GetBR();
            float extra = ImClamp(ImFabs(ta.x - tb.x) * 0.30f, 5.0f, 30.0f);    // add a bit of extra slack.
            ta.x += (window->Pos.x < child_menu_window->Pos.x) ? -0.5f : +0.5f; // to avoid numerical issues
            tb.y = ta.y + ImMax((tb.y - extra) - ta.y, -100.0f);                // triangle is maximum 200 high to limit the slope and the bias toward large sub-menus // FIXME: Multiply by fb_scale?
            tc.y = ta.y + ImMin((tc.y + extra) - ta.y, +100.0f);
            moving_toward_other_child_menu = ImTriangleContainsPoint(ta, tb, tc, g.IO.MousePos);
            //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddTriangleFilled(ta, tb, tc, moving_within_opened_triangle ? IM_COL32(0,128,0,128) : IM_COL32(128,0,0,128)); // [DEBUG]
        }
        if (menu_is_open && !hovered && g.HoveredWindow == window && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != id && !moving_toward_other_child_menu)
            want_close = true;

        if (!menu_is_open && hovered && pressed) // Click to open
            want_open = true;
        else if (!menu_is_open && hovered && !moving_toward_other_child_menu) // Hover to open
            want_open = true;

        if (g.NavActivateId == id)
        {
            want_close = menu_is_open;
            want_open = !menu_is_open;
        }
        if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right) // Nav-Right to open
        {
            want_open = true;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
    }
    else
    {
        // Menu bar
        if (menu_is_open && pressed && menuset_is_open) // Click an open menu again to close it
        {
            want_close = true;
            want_open = menu_is_open = false;
        }
        else if (pressed || (hovered && menuset_is_open && !menu_is_open)) // First click to open, then hover to open others
        {
            want_open = true;
        }
        else if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down) // Nav-Down to open
        {
            want_open = true;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
    }

    if (!enabled) // explicitly close if an open menu becomes disabled, facilitate users code a lot in pattern such as 'if (BeginMenu("options", has_object)) { ..use object.. }'
        want_close = true;
    if (want_close && IsPopupOpen(id))
        ClosePopupToLevel(g.BeginPopupStack.Size, true);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable | (menu_is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));

    if (!menu_is_open && want_open && g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size)
    {
        // Don't recycle same menu level in the same frame, first close the other menu and yield for a frame.
        OpenPopup(label);
        return false;
    }

    menu_is_open |= want_open;
    if (want_open)
        OpenPopup(label);

    if (menu_is_open)
    {
        // Sub-menus are ChildWindow so that mouse can be hovering across them (otherwise top-most popup menu would steal focus and not allow hovering on parent menu)
        SetNextWindowPos(popup_pos, ImGuiCond_Always);
        ImGuiWindowFlags flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus;
        if (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
            flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow;
        menu_is_open = BeginPopupEx(id, flags); // menu_is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
    }

    return menu_is_open;
}

void ImGui::EndMenu()
{
    // Nav: When a left move request _within our child menu_ failed, close ourselves (the _parent_ menu).
    // A menu doesn't close itself because EndMenuBar() wants the catch the last Left<>Right inputs.
    // However, it means that with the current code, a BeginMenu() from outside another menu or a menu-bar won't be closable with the Left direction.
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->ParentWindow == window && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical)
    {
        ClosePopupToLevel(g.BeginPopupStack.Size, true);
        NavMoveRequestCancel();
    }

    EndPopup();
}

bool ImGui::MenuItem(char const* label, char const* shortcut, bool selected, bool enabled)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    // We've been using the equivalent of ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover on all Selectable() since early Nav system days (commit 43ee5d73),
    // but I am unsure whether this should be kept at all. For now moved it to be an opt-in feature used by menus only.
    ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnRelease | ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover | (enabled ? 0 : ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled);
    bool pressed;
    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal)
    {
        // Mimic the exact layout spacing of BeginMenu() to allow MenuItem() inside a menu bar, which is a little misleading but may be useful
        // Note that in this situation we render neither the shortcut neither the selected tick mark
        float w = label_size.x;
        window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f, style.ItemSpacing.y));
        pressed = Selectable(label, false, flags, ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
        PopStyleVar();
        window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
    }
    else
    {
        ImVec2 shortcut_size = shortcut ? CalcTextSize(shortcut, NULL) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
        float w = window->MenuColumns.DeclColumns(label_size.x, shortcut_size.x, IM_FLOOR(g.FontSize * 1.20f)); // Feedback for next frame
        float extra_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - w);
        pressed = Selectable(label, false, flags | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth, ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
        if (shortcut_size.x > 0.0f)
        {
            PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
            RenderText(pos + ImVec2(window->MenuColumns.Pos[1] + extra_w, 0.0f), shortcut, NULL, false);
            PopStyleColor();
        }
        if (selected)
            RenderCheckMark(pos + ImVec2(window->MenuColumns.Pos[2] + extra_w + g.FontSize * 0.40f, g.FontSize * 0.134f * 0.5f), GetColorU32(enabled ? ImGuiCol_Text : ImGuiCol_TextDisabled), g.FontSize  * 0.866f);
    }

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(window->DC.LastItemId, label, window->DC.ItemFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable | (selected ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked : 0));
    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::MenuItem(char const* label, char const* shortcut, bool* p_selected, bool enabled)
{
    if (MenuItem(label, shortcut, p_selected ? *p_selected : false, enabled))
    {
        if (p_selected)
            *p_selected = !*p_selected;
        return true;
    }
    return false;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabBar, EndTabBar, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [BETA API] API may evolve!
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - BeginTabBar()
// - BeginTabBarEx() [Internal]
// - EndTabBar()
// - TabBarLayout() [Internal]
// - TabBarCalcTabID() [Internal]
// - TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth() [Internal]
// - TabBarFindTabById() [Internal]
// - TabBarAddTab() [Internal]
// - TabBarRemoveTab() [Internal]
// - TabBarCloseTab() [Internal]
// - TabBarScrollClamp()v
// - TabBarScrollToTab() [Internal]
// - TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder() [Internal]
// - TabBarScrollingButtons() [Internal]
// - TabBarTabListPopupButton() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

namespace ImGui
{
    static void             TabBarLayout(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
    static ImU32            TabBarCalcTabID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, char const* label);
    static float            TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth();
    static float            TabBarScrollClamp(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, float scrolling);
    static void             TabBarScrollToTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab);
    static ImGuiTabItem*    TabBarScrollingButtons(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
    static ImGuiTabItem*    TabBarTabListPopupButton(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
}

ImGuiTabBar::ImGuiTabBar()
{
    ID = 0;
    SelectedTabId = NextSelectedTabId = VisibleTabId = 0;
    CurrFrameVisible = PrevFrameVisible = -1;
    LastTabContentHeight = 0.0f;
    OffsetMax = OffsetMaxIdeal = OffsetNextTab = 0.0f;
    ScrollingAnim = ScrollingTarget = ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = ScrollingSpeed = 0.0f;
    Flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_None;
    ReorderRequestTabId = 0;
    ReorderRequestDir = 0;
    WantLayout = VisibleTabWasSubmitted = false;
    LastTabItemIdx = -1;
}

static int IMGUI_CDECL TabItemComparerByVisibleOffset(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
{
    const ImGuiTabItem* a = (const ImGuiTabItem*)lhs;
    const ImGuiTabItem* b = (const ImGuiTabItem*)rhs;
    return (int)(a->Offset - b->Offset);
}

static ImGuiTabBar* GetTabBarFromTabBarRef(const ImGuiPtrOrIndex& ref)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return ref.Ptr ? (ImGuiTabBar*)ref.Ptr : g.TabBars.GetByIndex(ref.Index);
}

static ImGuiPtrOrIndex GetTabBarRefFromTabBar(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.TabBars.Contains(tab_bar))
        return ImGuiPtrOrIndex(g.TabBars.GetIndex(tab_bar));
    return ImGuiPtrOrIndex(tab_bar);
}

bool    ImGui::BeginTabBar(char const* str_id, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
    ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.TabBars.GetOrAddByKey(id);
    ImRect tab_bar_bb = ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y, window->WorkRect.Max.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
    tab_bar->ID = id;
    return BeginTabBarEx(tab_bar, tab_bar_bb, flags | ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused, NULL);
}

bool    ImGui::BeginTabBarEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImRect& tab_bar_bb, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags, ImGuiDockNode* dock_node)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0)
        PushOverrideID(tab_bar->ID);

    // Add to stack
    g.CurrentTabBarStack.push_back(GetTabBarRefFromTabBar(tab_bar));
    g.CurrentTabBar = tab_bar;

    if (tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible == g.FrameCount)
    {
        //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("BeginTabBarEx already called this frame\n", g.FrameCount);
        //IM_ASSERT(0);
        return true;
    }

    // When toggling back from ordered to manually-reorderable, shuffle tabs to enforce the last visible order.
    // Otherwise, the most recently inserted tabs would move at the end of visible list which can be a little too confusing or magic for the user.
    if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) && tab_bar->Tabs.Size > 1 && tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible != -1)
        ImQsort(tab_bar->Tabs.Data, tab_bar->Tabs.Size, sizeof(ImGuiTabItem), TabItemComparerByVisibleOffset);

    // Flags
    if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_;

    tab_bar->Flags = flags;
    tab_bar->BarRect = tab_bar_bb;
    tab_bar->WantLayout = true; // Layout will be done on the first call to ItemTab()
    tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible = tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible;
    tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible = g.FrameCount;
    tab_bar->FramePadding = g.Style.FramePadding;

    // Layout
    ItemSize(ImVec2(tab_bar->OffsetMaxIdeal, tab_bar->BarRect.GetHeight()), tab_bar->FramePadding.y);
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x;

    // Draw separator
    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused) ? ImGuiCol_TabActive : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive);
    float const y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y - 1.0f;
    if (dock_node != NULL)
    {
        float const separator_min_x = dock_node->Pos.x + window->WindowBorderSize;
        float const separator_max_x = dock_node->Pos.x + dock_node->Size.x - window->WindowBorderSize;
        window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(separator_min_x, y), ImVec2(separator_max_x, y), col, 1.0f);
    }
    else
    {
        float const separator_min_x = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
        float const separator_max_x = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x + IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
        window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(separator_min_x, y), ImVec2(separator_max_x, y), col, 1.0f);
    }
    return true;
}

void    ImGui::EndTabBar()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
    if (tab_bar == NULL)
    {
        IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(tab_bar != NULL, "Mismatched BeginTabBar()/EndTabBar()!");
        return;
    }
    if (tab_bar->WantLayout)
        TabBarLayout(tab_bar);

    // Restore the last visible height if no tab is visible, this reduce vertical flicker/movement when a tabs gets removed without calling SetTabItemClosed().
    bool const tab_bar_appearing = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount);
    if (tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted || tab_bar->VisibleTabId == 0 || tab_bar_appearing)
        tab_bar->LastTabContentHeight = ImMax(window->DC.CursorPos.y - tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y, 0.0f);
    else
        window->DC.CursorPos.y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->LastTabContentHeight;

    if ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0)
        PopID();

    g.CurrentTabBarStack.pop_back();
    g.CurrentTabBar = g.CurrentTabBarStack.empty() ? NULL : GetTabBarFromTabBarRef(g.CurrentTabBarStack.back());
}

// This is called only once a frame before by the first call to ItemTab()
// The reason we're not calling it in BeginTabBar() is to leave a chance to the user to call the SetTabItemClosed() functions.
static void ImGui::TabBarLayout(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    tab_bar->WantLayout = false;

    // Garbage collect
    int tab_dst_n = 0;
    for (int tab_src_n = 0; tab_src_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_src_n++)
    {
        ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_src_n];
        if (tab->LastFrameVisible < tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible)
        {
            if (tab->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId)
                tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0;
            continue;
        }
        if (tab_dst_n != tab_src_n)
            tab_bar->Tabs[tab_dst_n] = tab_bar->Tabs[tab_src_n];
        tab_dst_n++;
    }
    if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size != tab_dst_n)
        tab_bar->Tabs.resize(tab_dst_n);

    // Setup next selected tab
    ImGuiID scroll_track_selected_tab_id = 0;
    if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId)
    {
        tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId;
        tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0;
        scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId;
    }

    // Process order change request (we could probably process it when requested but it's just saner to do it in a single spot).
    if (tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId != 0)
    {
        if (ImGuiTabItem* tab1 = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId))
        {
            //IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable); // <- this may happen when using debug tools
            int tab2_order = tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab1) + tab_bar->ReorderRequestDir;
            if (tab2_order >= 0 && tab2_order < tab_bar->Tabs.Size)
            {
                ImGuiTabItem* tab2 = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab2_order];
                ImGuiTabItem item_tmp = *tab1;
                *tab1 = *tab2;
                *tab2 = item_tmp;
                if (tab2->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId)
                    scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab2->ID;
                tab1 = tab2 = NULL;
            }
            if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_SaveSettings)
                MarkIniSettingsDirty();
        }
        tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId = 0;
    }

    // Tab List Popup (will alter tab_bar->BarRect and therefore the available width!)
    bool const tab_list_popup_button = (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton) != 0;
    if (tab_list_popup_button)
        if (ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_select = TabBarTabListPopupButton(tab_bar)) // NB: Will alter BarRect.Max.x!
            scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_to_select->ID;

    // Compute ideal widths
    g.ShrinkWidthBuffer.resize(tab_bar->Tabs.Size);
    float width_total_contents = 0.0f;
    ImGuiTabItem* most_recently_selected_tab = NULL;
    bool found_selected_tab_id = false;
    for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
    {
        ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
        IM_ASSERT(tab->LastFrameVisible >= tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible);

        if (most_recently_selected_tab == NULL || most_recently_selected_tab->LastFrameSelected < tab->LastFrameSelected)
            most_recently_selected_tab = tab;
        if (tab->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId)
            found_selected_tab_id = true;

        // Refresh tab width immediately, otherwise changes of style e.g. style.FramePadding.x would noticeably lag in the tab bar.
        // Additionally, when using TabBarAddTab() to manipulate tab bar order we occasionally insert new tabs that don't have a width yet,
        // and we cannot wait for the next BeginTabItem() call. We cannot compute this width within TabBarAddTab() because font size depends on the active window.
        char const* tab_name = tab_bar->GetTabName(tab);
        bool const has_close_button = tab->Window ? tab->Window->HasCloseButton : ((tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton) == 0);
        tab->ContentWidth = TabItemCalcSize(tab_name, has_close_button).x;

        width_total_contents += (tab_n > 0 ? g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f) + tab->ContentWidth;

        // Store data so we can build an array sorted by width if we need to shrink tabs down
        g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Index = tab_n;
        g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Width = tab->ContentWidth;
    }

    // Compute width
    float const initial_offset_x = 0.0f; // g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
    float const width_avail = ImMax(tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() - initial_offset_x, 0.0f);
    float width_excess = (width_avail < width_total_contents) ? (width_total_contents - width_avail) : 0.0f;
    if (width_excess > 0.0f && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown))
    {
        // If we don't have enough room, resize down the largest tabs first
        ShrinkWidths(g.ShrinkWidthBuffer.Data, g.ShrinkWidthBuffer.Size, width_excess);
        for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
            tab_bar->Tabs[g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Index].Width = IM_FLOOR(g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Width);
    }
    else
    {
        float const tab_max_width = TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth();
        for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
        {
            ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
            tab->Width = ImMin(tab->ContentWidth, tab_max_width);
            IM_ASSERT(tab->Width > 0.0f);
        }
    }

    // Layout all active tabs
    float offset_x = initial_offset_x;
    float offset_x_ideal = offset_x;
    tab_bar->OffsetNextTab = offset_x; // This is used by non-reorderable tab bar where the submission order is always honored.
    for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
    {
        ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
        tab->Offset = offset_x;
        if (scroll_track_selected_tab_id == 0 && g.NavJustMovedToId == tab->ID)
            scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab->ID;
        offset_x += tab->Width + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
        offset_x_ideal += tab->ContentWidth + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
    }
    tab_bar->OffsetMax = ImMax(offset_x - g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, 0.0f);
    tab_bar->OffsetMaxIdeal = ImMax(offset_x_ideal - g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, 0.0f);

    // Horizontal scrolling buttons
    bool const scrolling_buttons = (tab_bar->OffsetMax > tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() && tab_bar->Tabs.Size > 1) && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTabListScrollingButtons) && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll);
    if (scrolling_buttons)
        if (ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_select = TabBarScrollingButtons(tab_bar)) // NB: Will alter BarRect.Max.x!
            scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_to_select->ID;

    // If we have lost the selected tab, select the next most recently active one
    if (found_selected_tab_id == false)
        tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0;
    if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0 && tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == 0 && most_recently_selected_tab != NULL)
        scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId = most_recently_selected_tab->ID;

    // Lock in visible tab
    tab_bar->VisibleTabId = tab_bar->SelectedTabId;
    tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted = false;

    // CTRL+TAB can override visible tab temporarily
    if (g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL && g.NavWindowingTarget->DockNode && g.NavWindowingTarget->DockNode->TabBar == tab_bar)
        tab_bar->VisibleTabId = scroll_track_selected_tab_id = g.NavWindowingTarget->ID;

    // Update scrolling
    if (scroll_track_selected_tab_id)
        if (ImGuiTabItem* scroll_track_selected_tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, scroll_track_selected_tab_id))
            TabBarScrollToTab(tab_bar, scroll_track_selected_tab);
    tab_bar->ScrollingAnim = TabBarScrollClamp(tab_bar, tab_bar->ScrollingAnim);
    tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = TabBarScrollClamp(tab_bar, tab_bar->ScrollingTarget);
    if (tab_bar->ScrollingAnim != tab_bar->ScrollingTarget)
    {
        // Scrolling speed adjust itself so we can always reach our target in 1/3 seconds.
        // Teleport if we are aiming far off the visible line
        tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed = ImMax(tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed, 70.0f * g.FontSize);
        tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed = ImMax(tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed, ImFabs(tab_bar->ScrollingTarget - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim) / 0.3f);
        bool const teleport = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount) || (tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility > 10.0f * g.FontSize);
        tab_bar->ScrollingAnim = teleport ? tab_bar->ScrollingTarget : ImLinearSweep(tab_bar->ScrollingAnim, tab_bar->ScrollingTarget, g.IO.DeltaTime * tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed);
    }
    else
    {
        tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed = 0.0f;
    }

    // Clear name buffers
    if ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0)
        tab_bar->TabsNames.Buf.resize(0);
}

// Dockables uses Name/ID in the global namespace. Non-dockable items use the ID stack.
static ImU32   ImGui::TabBarCalcTabID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, char const* label)
{
    if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode)
    {
        ImGuiID id = ImHashStr(label);
        KeepAliveID(id);
        return id;
    }
    else
    {
        ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
        return window->GetID(label);
    }
}

static float ImGui::TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.FontSize * 20.0f;
}

ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarFindTabByID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id)
{
    if (tab_id != 0)
        for (int n = 0; n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; n++)
            if (tab_bar->Tabs[n].ID == tab_id)
                return &tab_bar->Tabs[n];
    return NULL;
}

// FIXME: See references to #2304 in TODO.txt
ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarFindMostRecentlySelectedTabForActiveWindow(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
{
    ImGuiTabItem* most_recently_selected_tab = NULL;
    for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
    {
        ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
        if (most_recently_selected_tab == NULL || most_recently_selected_tab->LastFrameSelected < tab->LastFrameSelected)
            if (tab->Window && tab->Window->WasActive)
                most_recently_selected_tab = tab;
    }
    return most_recently_selected_tab;
}

// The purpose of this call is to register tab in advance so we can control their order at the time they appear.
// Otherwise calling this is unnecessary as tabs are appending as needed by the BeginTabItem() function.
void ImGui::TabBarAddTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItemFlags tab_flags, ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, window->ID) == NULL);
    IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentTabBar == NULL);                     // Can't work while the tab bar is active as our tab doesn't have an X offset yet

    ImGuiTabItem new_tab;
    new_tab.ID = window->ID;
    new_tab.Flags = tab_flags;
    new_tab.LastFrameVisible = tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible;   // Required so BeginTabBar() doesn't ditch the tab
    if (new_tab.LastFrameVisible == -1)
        new_tab.LastFrameVisible = g.FrameCount - 1;
    new_tab.Window = window;                                // Required so tab bar layout can compute the tab width before tab submission
    tab_bar->Tabs.push_back(new_tab);
}

// The *TabId fields be already set by the docking system _before_ the actual TabItem was created, so we clear them regardless.
void ImGui::TabBarRemoveTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id)
{
    if (ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_id))
        tab_bar->Tabs.erase(tab);
    if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == tab_id)      { tab_bar->VisibleTabId = 0; }
    if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab_id)     { tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0; }
    if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == tab_id) { tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0; }
}

// Called on manual closure attempt
void ImGui::TabBarCloseTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab)
{
    if ((tab_bar->VisibleTabId == tab->ID) && !(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument))
    {
        // This will remove a frame of lag for selecting another tab on closure.
        // However we don't run it in the case where the 'Unsaved' flag is set, so user gets a chance to fully undo the closure
        tab->LastFrameVisible = -1;
        tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0;
    }
    else if ((tab_bar->VisibleTabId != tab->ID) && (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument))
    {
        // Actually select before expecting closure
        tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = tab->ID;
    }
}

static float ImGui::TabBarScrollClamp(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, float scrolling)
{
    scrolling = ImMin(scrolling, tab_bar->OffsetMax - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth());
    return ImMax(scrolling, 0.0f);
}

static void ImGui::TabBarScrollToTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    float margin = g.FontSize * 1.0f; // When to scroll to make Tab N+1 visible always make a bit of N visible to suggest more scrolling area (since we don't have a scrollbar)
    int order = tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab);
    float tab_x1 = tab->Offset + (order > 0 ? -margin : 0.0f);
    float tab_x2 = tab->Offset + tab->Width + (order + 1 < tab_bar->Tabs.Size ? margin : 1.0f);
    tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = 0.0f;
    if (tab_bar->ScrollingTarget > tab_x1 || (tab_x2 - tab_x1 >= tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth()))
    {
        tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = ImMax(tab_bar->ScrollingAnim - tab_x2, 0.0f);
        tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = tab_x1;
    }
    else if (tab_bar->ScrollingTarget < tab_x2 - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth())
    {
        tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = ImMax((tab_x1 - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth()) - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim, 0.0f);
        tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = tab_x2 - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth();
    }
}

void ImGui::TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImGuiTabItem* tab, int dir)
{
    IM_ASSERT(dir == -1 || dir == +1);
    IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId == 0);
    tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId = tab->ID;
    tab_bar->ReorderRequestDir = (ImS8)dir;
}

static ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarScrollingButtons(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    const ImVec2 arrow_button_size(g.FontSize - 2.0f, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
    float const scrolling_buttons_width = arrow_button_size.x * 2.0f;

    const ImVec2 backup_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    //window->DrawList->AddRect(ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - scrolling_buttons_width, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y), ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y), IM_COL32(255,0,0,255));

    const ImRect avail_bar_rect = tab_bar->BarRect;
    bool want_clip_rect = !avail_bar_rect.Contains(ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(scrolling_buttons_width, 0.0f)));
    if (want_clip_rect)
        PushClipRect(tab_bar->BarRect.Min, tab_bar->BarRect.Max + ImVec2(g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, 0.0f), true);

    ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_select = NULL;

    int select_dir = 0;
    ImVec4 arrow_col = g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Text];
    arrow_col.w *= 0.5f;

    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, arrow_col);
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0));
    float const backup_repeat_delay = g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay;
    float const backup_repeat_rate = g.IO.KeyRepeatRate;
    g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay = 0.250f;
    g.IO.KeyRepeatRate = 0.200f;
    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - scrolling_buttons_width, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y);
    if (ArrowButtonEx("##<", ImGuiDir_Left, arrow_button_size, ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat))
        select_dir = -1;
    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - scrolling_buttons_width + arrow_button_size.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y);
    if (ArrowButtonEx("##>", ImGuiDir_Right, arrow_button_size, ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat))
        select_dir = +1;
    PopStyleColor(2);
    g.IO.KeyRepeatRate = backup_repeat_rate;
    g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay = backup_repeat_delay;

    if (want_clip_rect)
        PopClipRect();

    if (select_dir != 0)
        if (ImGuiTabItem* tab_item = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_bar->SelectedTabId))
        {
            int selected_order = tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab_item);
            int target_order = selected_order + select_dir;
            tab_to_select = &tab_bar->Tabs[(target_order >= 0 && target_order < tab_bar->Tabs.Size) ? target_order : selected_order]; // If we are at the end of the list, still scroll to make our tab visible
        }
    window->DC.CursorPos = backup_cursor_pos;
    tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x -= scrolling_buttons_width + 1.0f;

    return tab_to_select;
}

static ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarTabListPopupButton(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    // We use g.Style.FramePadding.y to match the square ArrowButton size
    float const tab_list_popup_button_width = g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y;
    const ImVec2 backup_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - g.Style.FramePadding.y, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y);
    tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x += tab_list_popup_button_width;

    ImVec4 arrow_col = g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Text];
    arrow_col.w *= 0.5f;
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, arrow_col);
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0));
    bool open = BeginCombo("##v", NULL, ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview);
    PopStyleColor(2);

    ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_select = NULL;
    if (open)
    {
        for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
        {
            ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
            char const* tab_name = tab_bar->GetTabName(tab);
            if (Selectable(tab_name, tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab->ID))
                tab_to_select = tab;
        }
        EndCombo();
    }

    window->DC.CursorPos = backup_cursor_pos;
    return tab_to_select;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabItem, EndTabItem, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [BETA API] API may evolve!
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - BeginTabItem()
// - EndTabItem()
// - TabItemEx() [Internal]
// - SetTabItemClosed()
// - TabItemCalcSize() [Internal]
// - TabItemBackground() [Internal]
// - TabItemLabelAndCloseButton() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

bool    ImGui::BeginTabItem(char const* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
    if (tab_bar == NULL)
    {
        IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(tab_bar, "BeginTabItem() Needs to be called between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar()!");
        return false;
    }
    bool ret = TabItemEx(tab_bar, label, p_open, flags, NULL);
    if (ret && !(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId))
    {
        ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx];
        PushOverrideID(tab->ID); // We already hashed 'label' so push into the ID stack directly instead of doing another hash through PushID(label)
    }
    return ret;
}

void    ImGui::EndTabItem()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
    if (tab_bar == NULL)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(tab_bar != NULL && "Needs to be called between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar()!");
        return;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx >= 0);
    ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx];
    if (!(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId))
        window->IDStack.pop_back();
}

bool    ImGui::TabItemEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, char const* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImGuiWindow* docked_window)
{
    // Layout whole tab bar if not already done
    if (tab_bar->WantLayout)
        TabBarLayout(tab_bar);

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = TabBarCalcTabID(tab_bar, label);

    // If the user called us with *p_open == false, we early out and don't render. We make a dummy call to ItemAdd() so that attempts to use a contextual popup menu with an implicit ID won't use an older ID.
    if (p_open && !*p_open)
    {
        PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus, true);
        ItemAdd(ImRect(), id);
        PopItemFlag();
        return false;
    }

    // Store into ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton, also honor ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton passed by user (although not documented)
    if (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton)
        p_open = NULL;
    else if (p_open == NULL)
        flags |= ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton;

    // Calculate tab contents size
    ImVec2 size = TabItemCalcSize(label, p_open != NULL);

    // Acquire tab data
    ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, id);
    bool tab_is_new = false;
    if (tab == NULL)
    {
        tab_bar->Tabs.push_back(ImGuiTabItem());
        tab = &tab_bar->Tabs.back();
        tab->ID = id;
        tab->Width = size.x;
        tab_is_new = true;
    }
    tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx = (short)tab_bar->Tabs.index_from_ptr(tab);
    tab->ContentWidth = size.x;

    bool const tab_bar_appearing = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount);
    bool const tab_bar_focused = (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused) != 0;
    bool const tab_appearing = (tab->LastFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount);
    tab->LastFrameVisible = g.FrameCount;
    tab->Flags = flags;
    tab->Window = docked_window;

    // Append name with zero-terminator
    if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(tab->Window != NULL);
        tab->NameOffset = -1;
    }
    else
    {
        IM_ASSERT(tab->Window == NULL);
        tab->NameOffset = tab_bar->TabsNames.size();
        tab_bar->TabsNames.append(label, label + strlen(label) + 1); // Append name _with_ the zero-terminator.
    }

    // If we are not reorderable, always reset offset based on submission order.
    // (We already handled layout and sizing using the previous known order, but sizing is not affected by order!)
    if (!tab_appearing && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable))
    {
        tab->Offset = tab_bar->OffsetNextTab;
        tab_bar->OffsetNextTab += tab->Width + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
    }

    // Update selected tab
    if (tab_appearing && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs) && tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == 0)
        if (!tab_bar_appearing || tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0)
            tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = id;  // New tabs gets activated
    if ((flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SetSelected) && (tab_bar->SelectedTabId != id)) // SetSelected can only be passed on explicit tab bar
        tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = id;

    // Lock visibility
    bool tab_contents_visible = (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == id);
    if (tab_contents_visible)
        tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted = true;

    // On the very first frame of a tab bar we let first tab contents be visible to minimize appearing glitches
    if (!tab_contents_visible && tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0 && tab_bar_appearing && docked_window == NULL)
        if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size == 1 && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs))
            tab_contents_visible = true;

    if (tab_appearing && !(tab_bar_appearing && !tab_is_new))
    {
        PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus, true);
        ItemAdd(ImRect(), id);
        PopItemFlag();
        return tab_contents_visible;
    }

    if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == id)
        tab->LastFrameSelected = g.FrameCount;

    // Backup current layout position
    const ImVec2 backup_main_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;

    // Layout
    size.x = tab->Width;
    window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BarRect.Min + ImVec2(IM_FLOOR(tab->Offset - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim), 0.0f);
    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    ImRect bb(pos, pos + size);

    // We don't have CPU clipping primitives to clip the CloseButton (until it becomes a texture), so need to add an extra draw call (temporary in the case of vertical animation)
    bool want_clip_rect = (bb.Min.x < tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x) || (bb.Max.x > tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x);
    if (want_clip_rect)
        PushClipRect(ImVec2(ImMax(bb.Min.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x), bb.Min.y - 1), ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x, bb.Max.y), true);

    ImVec2 backup_cursor_max_pos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos;
    ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), style.FramePadding.y);
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = backup_cursor_max_pos;

    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
    {
        if (want_clip_rect)
            PopClipRect();
        window->DC.CursorPos = backup_main_cursor_pos;
        return tab_contents_visible;
    }

    // Click to Select a tab
    ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = (ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap);
    if (g.DragDropActive && !g.DragDropPayload.IsDataType(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_WINDOW))
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold;
    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
    if (pressed)
        tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = id;
    hovered |= (g.HoveredId == id);

    // Allow the close button to overlap unless we are dragging (in which case we don't want any overlapping tabs to be hovered)
    if (!held)
        SetItemAllowOverlap();

    // Drag and drop a single floating window node moves it
    ImGuiDockNode* node = docked_window ? docked_window->DockNode : NULL;
    bool const single_floating_window_node = node && node->IsFloatingNode() && (node->Windows.Size == 1);
    if (held && single_floating_window_node && IsMouseDragging(0, 0.0f))
    {
        // Move
        StartMouseMovingWindow(docked_window);
    }
    else if (held && !tab_appearing && IsMouseDragging(0))
    {
        // Drag and drop: re-order tabs
        float drag_distance_from_edge_x = 0.0f;
        if (!g.DragDropActive && ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) || (docked_window != NULL)))
        {
            // While moving a tab it will jump on the other side of the mouse, so we also test for MouseDelta.x
            if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x < 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x < bb.Min.x)
            {
                drag_distance_from_edge_x = bb.Min.x - g.IO.MousePos.x;
                if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable)
                    TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder(tab_bar, tab, -1);
            }
            else if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x > 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x > bb.Max.x)
            {
                drag_distance_from_edge_x = g.IO.MousePos.x - bb.Max.x;
                if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable)
                    TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder(tab_bar, tab, +1);
            }
        }

        // Extract a Dockable window out of it's tab bar
        if (docked_window != NULL && !(docked_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove))
        {
            // We use a variable threshold to distinguish dragging tabs within a tab bar and extracting them out of the tab bar
            bool undocking_tab = (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == id);

            if (!undocking_tab) //&& (!g.IO.ConfigDockingWithShift || g.IO.KeyShift)
            {
                float threshold_base = g.FontSize;
                //float threshold_base = g.IO.ConfigDockingWithShift ? g.FontSize * 0.5f : g.FontSize;
                float threshold_x = (threshold_base * 2.2f);
                float threshold_y = (threshold_base * 1.5f) + ImClamp((ImFabs(g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[0].x) - threshold_base * 2.0f) * 0.20f, 0.0f, threshold_base * 4.0f);
                //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(ImVec2(bb.Min.x - threshold_x, bb.Min.y - threshold_y), ImVec2(bb.Max.x + threshold_x, bb.Max.y + threshold_y), IM_COL32_WHITE); // [DEBUG]

                float distance_from_edge_y = ImMax(bb.Min.y - g.IO.MousePos.y, g.IO.MousePos.y - bb.Max.y);
                if (distance_from_edge_y >= threshold_y)
                    undocking_tab = true;
                else if (drag_distance_from_edge_x > threshold_x)
                    if ((tab_bar->ReorderRequestDir < 0 && tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab) == 0) || (tab_bar->ReorderRequestDir > 0 && tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab) == tab_bar->Tabs.Size - 1))
                        undocking_tab = true;
            }

            if (undocking_tab)
            {
                // Undock
                DockContextQueueUndockWindow(&g, docked_window);
                g.MovingWindow = docked_window;
                g.ActiveId = g.MovingWindow->MoveId;
                g.ActiveIdClickOffset -= g.MovingWindow->Pos - bb.Min;
            }
        }
    }

#if 0
    if (hovered && g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer > 0.50f && bb.GetWidth() < tab->ContentWidth)
    {
        // Enlarge tab display when hovering
        bb.Max.x = bb.Min.x + IM_FLOOR(ImLerp(bb.GetWidth(), tab->ContentWidth, ImSaturate((g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer - 0.40f) * 6.0f)));
        display_draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(window);
        TabItemBackground(display_draw_list, bb, flags, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive));
    }
#endif

    // Render tab shape
    ImDrawList* display_draw_list = window->DrawList;
    const ImU32 tab_col = GetColorU32((held || hovered) ? ImGuiCol_TabHovered : tab_contents_visible ? (tab_bar_focused ? ImGuiCol_TabActive : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive) : (tab_bar_focused ? ImGuiCol_Tab : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused));
    TabItemBackground(display_draw_list, bb, flags, tab_col);
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);

    // Select with right mouse button. This is so the common idiom for context menu automatically highlight the current widget.
    bool const hovered_unblocked = IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup);
    if (hovered_unblocked && (IsMouseClicked(1) || IsMouseReleased(1)))
        tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = id;

    if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton)
        flags |= ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton;

    // Render tab label, process close button
    const ImGuiID close_button_id = p_open ? window->GetID((void*)((intptr_t)id + 1)) : 0;
    bool just_closed = TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(display_draw_list, bb, flags, tab_bar->FramePadding, label, id, close_button_id);
    if (just_closed && p_open != NULL)
    {
        *p_open = false;
        TabBarCloseTab(tab_bar, tab);
    }

    // Restore main window position so user can draw there
    if (want_clip_rect)
        PopClipRect();
    window->DC.CursorPos = backup_main_cursor_pos;

    // Tooltip (FIXME: Won't work over the close button because ItemOverlap systems messes up with HoveredIdTimer)
    // We test IsItemHovered() to discard e.g. when another item is active or drag and drop over the tab bar (which g.HoveredId ignores)
    if (g.HoveredId == id && !held && g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer > 0.50f && IsItemHovered())
        if (!(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTooltip))
            SetTooltip("%.*s", (int)(FindRenderedTextEnd(label) - label), label);

    return tab_contents_visible;
}

// [Public] This is call is 100% optional but it allows to remove some one-frame glitches when a tab has been unexpectedly removed.
// To use it to need to call the function SetTabItemClosed() after BeginTabBar() and before any call to BeginTabItem()
void    ImGui::SetTabItemClosed(char const* label)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    bool is_within_manual_tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar && !(g.CurrentTabBar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode);
    if (is_within_manual_tab_bar)
    {
        ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
        IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->WantLayout);         // Needs to be called AFTER BeginTabBar() and BEFORE the first call to BeginTabItem()
        ImGuiID tab_id = TabBarCalcTabID(tab_bar, label);
        TabBarRemoveTab(tab_bar, tab_id);
    }
    else if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(label))
    {
        if (window->DockIsActive)
            if (ImGuiDockNode* node = window->DockNode)
            {
                ImGuiID tab_id = TabBarCalcTabID(node->TabBar, label);
                TabBarRemoveTab(node->TabBar, tab_id);
                window->DockTabWantClose = true;
            }
    }
}

ImVec2 ImGui::TabItemCalcSize(char const* label, bool has_close_button)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    ImVec2 size = ImVec2(label_size.x + g.Style.FramePadding.x, label_size.y + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
    if (has_close_button)
        size.x += g.Style.FramePadding.x + (g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + g.FontSize); // We use Y intentionally to fit the close button circle.
    else
        size.x += g.Style.FramePadding.x + 1.0f;
    return ImVec2(ImMin(size.x, TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth()), size.y);
}

void ImGui::TabItemBackground(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImU32 col)
{
    // While rendering tabs, we trim 1 pixel off the top of our bounding box so they can fit within a regular frame height while looking "detached" from it.
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    float const width = bb.GetWidth();
    IM_UNUSED(flags);
    IM_ASSERT(width > 0.0f);
    float const rounding = ImMax(0.0f, ImMin(g.Style.TabRounding, width * 0.5f - 1.0f));
    float const y1 = bb.Min.y + 1.0f;
    float const y2 = bb.Max.y + ((flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Preview) ? 0.0f : -1.0f);
    draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Min.x, y2));
    draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + rounding, y1 + rounding), rounding, 6, 9);
    draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - rounding, y1 + rounding), rounding, 9, 12);
    draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Max.x, y2));
    draw_list->PathFillConvex(col);
    if (g.Style.TabBorderSize > 0.0f)
    {
        draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + 0.5f, y2));
        draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + rounding + 0.5f, y1 + rounding + 0.5f), rounding, 6, 9);
        draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - rounding - 0.5f, y1 + rounding + 0.5f), rounding, 9, 12);
        draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - 0.5f, y2));
        draw_list->PathStroke(GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), false, g.Style.TabBorderSize);
    }
}

// Render text label (with custom clipping) + Unsaved Document marker + Close Button logic
// We tend to lock style.FramePadding for a given tab-bar, hence the 'frame_padding' parameter.
bool ImGui::TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImVec2 frame_padding, char const* label, ImGuiID tab_id, ImGuiID close_button_id)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    if (bb.GetWidth() <= 1.0f)
        return false;

    // Render text label (with clipping + alpha gradient) + unsaved marker
    char const* TAB_UNSAVED_MARKER = "*";
    ImRect text_pixel_clip_bb(bb.Min.x + frame_padding.x, bb.Min.y + frame_padding.y, bb.Max.x - frame_padding.x, bb.Max.y);
    if (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument)
    {
        text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x -= CalcTextSize(TAB_UNSAVED_MARKER, NULL, false).x;
        ImVec2 unsaved_marker_pos(ImMin(bb.Min.x + frame_padding.x + label_size.x + 2, text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x), bb.Min.y + frame_padding.y + IM_FLOOR(-g.FontSize * 0.25f));
        RenderTextClippedEx(draw_list, unsaved_marker_pos, bb.Max - frame_padding, TAB_UNSAVED_MARKER, NULL, NULL);
    }
    ImRect text_ellipsis_clip_bb = text_pixel_clip_bb;

    // Close Button
    // We are relying on a subtle and confusing distinction between 'hovered' and 'g.HoveredId' which happens because we are using ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlapMode + SetItemAllowOverlap()
    //  'hovered' will be true when hovering the Tab but NOT when hovering the close button
    //  'g.HoveredId==id' will be true when hovering the Tab including when hovering the close button
    //  'g.ActiveId==close_button_id' will be true when we are holding on the close button, in which case both hovered booleans are false
    bool close_button_pressed = false;
    bool close_button_visible = false;
    if (close_button_id != 0)
        if (g.HoveredId == tab_id || g.HoveredId == close_button_id || g.ActiveId == close_button_id)
            close_button_visible = true;
    if (close_button_visible)
    {
        ImGuiItemHoveredDataBackup last_item_backup;
        float const close_button_sz = g.FontSize;
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, frame_padding);
        if (CloseButton(close_button_id, ImVec2(bb.Max.x - frame_padding.x * 2.0f - close_button_sz, bb.Min.y)))
            close_button_pressed = true;
        PopStyleVar();
        last_item_backup.Restore();

        // Close with middle mouse button
        if (!(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton) && IsMouseClicked(2))
            close_button_pressed = true;

        text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x -= close_button_sz;
    }

    float ellipsis_max_x = close_button_visible ? text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x : bb.Max.x - 1.0f;
    RenderTextEllipsis(draw_list, text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Min, text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Max, text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x, ellipsis_max_x, label, NULL, &label_size);

    return close_button_pressed;
}


//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Columns, BeginColumns, EndColumns, etc.
// In the current version, Columns are very weak. Needs to be replaced with a more full-featured system.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - GetColumnIndex()
// - GetColumnCount()
// - GetColumnOffset()
// - GetColumnWidth()
// - SetColumnOffset()
// - SetColumnWidth()
// - PushColumnClipRect() [Internal]
// - PushColumnsBackground() [Internal]
// - PopColumnsBackground() [Internal]
// - FindOrCreateColumns() [Internal]
// - GetColumnsID() [Internal]
// - BeginColumns()
// - NextColumn()
// - EndColumns()
// - Columns()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

int ImGui::GetColumnIndex()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->DC.CurrentColumns ? window->DC.CurrentColumns->Current : 0;
}

int ImGui::GetColumnsCount()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->DC.CurrentColumns ? window->DC.CurrentColumns->Count : 1;
}

float ImGui::GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(const ImGuiColumns* columns, float offset_norm)
{
    return offset_norm * (columns->OffMaxX - columns->OffMinX);
}

float ImGui::GetColumnNormFromOffset(const ImGuiColumns* columns, float offset)
{
    return offset / (columns->OffMaxX - columns->OffMinX);
}

static float const COLUMNS_HIT_RECT_HALF_WIDTH = 4.0f;

static float GetDraggedColumnOffset(ImGuiColumns* columns, int column_index)
{
    // Active (dragged) column always follow mouse. The reason we need this is that dragging a column to the right edge of an auto-resizing
    // window creates a feedback loop because we store normalized positions. So while dragging we enforce absolute positioning.
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    IM_ASSERT(column_index > 0); // We are not supposed to drag column 0.
    IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == columns->ID + ImGuiID(column_index));

    float x = g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x + COLUMNS_HIT_RECT_HALF_WIDTH - window->Pos.x;
    x = ImMax(x, ImGui::GetColumnOffset(column_index - 1) + g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing);
    if ((columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths))
        x = ImMin(x, ImGui::GetColumnOffset(column_index + 1) - g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing);

    return x;
}

float ImGui::GetColumnOffset(int column_index)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    if (columns == NULL)
        return 0.0f;

    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;
    IM_ASSERT(column_index < columns->Columns.Size);

    float const t = columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm;
    float const x_offset = ImLerp(columns->OffMinX, columns->OffMaxX, t);
    return x_offset;
}

static float GetColumnWidthEx(ImGuiColumns* columns, int column_index, bool before_resize = false)
{
    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;

    float offset_norm;
    if (before_resize)
        offset_norm = columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNormBeforeResize - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNormBeforeResize;
    else
        offset_norm = columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNorm - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm;
    return ImGui::GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(columns, offset_norm);
}

float ImGui::GetColumnWidth(int column_index)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    if (columns == NULL)
        return GetContentRegionAvail().x;

    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;
    return GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(columns, columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNorm - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm);
}

void ImGui::SetColumnOffset(int column_index, float offset)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);

    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;
    IM_ASSERT(column_index < columns->Columns.Size);

    bool const preserve_width = !(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths) && (column_index < columns->Count-1);
    float const width = preserve_width ? GetColumnWidthEx(columns, column_index, columns->IsBeingResized) : 0.0f;

    if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoForceWithinWindow))
        offset = ImMin(offset, columns->OffMaxX - g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing * (columns->Count - column_index));
    columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm = GetColumnNormFromOffset(columns, offset - columns->OffMinX);

    if (preserve_width)
        SetColumnOffset(column_index + 1, offset + ImMax(g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing, width));
}

void ImGui::SetColumnWidth(int column_index, float width)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);

    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;
    SetColumnOffset(column_index + 1, GetColumnOffset(column_index) + width);
}

void ImGui::PushColumnClipRect(int column_index)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;

    ImGuiColumnData* column = &columns->Columns[column_index];
    PushClipRect(column->ClipRect.Min, column->ClipRect.Max, false);
}

// Get into the columns background draw command (which is generally the same draw command as before we called BeginColumns)
void ImGui::PushColumnsBackground()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    if (columns->Count == 1)
        return;
    window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(0);
    int cmd_size = window->DrawList->CmdBuffer.Size;
    PushClipRect(columns->HostClipRect.Min, columns->HostClipRect.Max, false);
    IM_UNUSED(cmd_size);
    IM_ASSERT(cmd_size == window->DrawList->CmdBuffer.Size); // Being in channel 0 this should not have created an ImDrawCmd
}

void ImGui::PopColumnsBackground()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    if (columns->Count == 1)
        return;
    window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(columns->Current + 1);
    PopClipRect();
}

ImGuiColumns* ImGui::FindOrCreateColumns(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id)
{
    // We have few columns per window so for now we don't need bother much with turning this into a faster lookup.
    for (int n = 0; n < window->ColumnsStorage.Size; n++)
        if (window->ColumnsStorage[n].ID == id)
            return &window->ColumnsStorage[n];

    window->ColumnsStorage.push_back(ImGuiColumns());
    ImGuiColumns* columns = &window->ColumnsStorage.back();
    columns->ID = id;
    return columns;
}

ImGuiID ImGui::GetColumnsID(char const* str_id, int columns_count)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();

    // Differentiate column ID with an arbitrary prefix for cases where users name their columns set the same as another widget.
    // In addition, when an identifier isn't explicitly provided we include the number of columns in the hash to make it uniquer.
    PushID(0x11223347 + (str_id ? 0 : columns_count));
    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id ? str_id : "columns");
    PopID();

    return id;
}

void ImGui::BeginColumns(char const* str_id, int columns_count, ImGuiColumnsFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();

    IM_ASSERT(columns_count >= 1 && columns_count <= 64);   // Maximum 64 columns
    IM_ASSERT(window->DC.CurrentColumns == NULL);           // Nested columns are currently not supported

    // Acquire storage for the columns set
    ImGuiID id = GetColumnsID(str_id, columns_count);
    ImGuiColumns* columns = FindOrCreateColumns(window, id);
    IM_ASSERT(columns->ID == id);
    columns->Current = 0;
    columns->Count = columns_count;
    columns->Flags = flags;
    window->DC.CurrentColumns = columns;

    columns->HostCursorPosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
    columns->HostCursorMaxPosX = window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x;
    columns->HostClipRect = window->ClipRect;
    columns->HostWorkRect = window->WorkRect;

    // Set state for first column
    // We aim so that the right-most column will have the same clipping width as other after being clipped by parent ClipRect
    float const column_padding = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
    float const half_clip_extend_x = ImFloor(ImMax(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f, window->WindowBorderSize));
    float const max_1 = window->WorkRect.Max.x + column_padding - ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f);
    float const max_2 = window->WorkRect.Max.x + half_clip_extend_x;
    columns->OffMinX = window->DC.Indent.x - column_padding + ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f);
    columns->OffMaxX = ImMax(ImMin(max_1, max_2) - window->Pos.x, columns->OffMinX + 1.0f);
    columns->LineMinY = columns->LineMaxY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;

    // Clear data if columns count changed
    if (columns->Columns.Size != 0 && columns->Columns.Size != columns_count + 1)
        columns->Columns.resize(0);

    // Initialize default widths
    columns->IsFirstFrame = (columns->Columns.Size == 0);
    if (columns->Columns.Size == 0)
    {
        columns->Columns.reserve(columns_count + 1);
        for (int n = 0; n < columns_count + 1; n++)
        {
            ImGuiColumnData column;
            column.OffsetNorm = n / (float)columns_count;
            columns->Columns.push_back(column);
        }
    }

    for (int n = 0; n < columns_count; n++)
    {
        // Compute clipping rectangle
        ImGuiColumnData* column = &columns->Columns[n];
        float clip_x1 = IM_ROUND(window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n));
        float clip_x2 = IM_ROUND(window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n + 1) - 1.0f);
        column->ClipRect = ImRect(clip_x1, -FLT_MAX, clip_x2, +FLT_MAX);
        column->ClipRect.ClipWith(window->ClipRect);
    }

    if (columns->Count > 1)
    {
        window->DrawList->ChannelsSplit(1 + columns->Count);
        window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(1);
        PushColumnClipRect(0);
    }

    // We don't generally store Indent.x inside ColumnsOffset because it may be manipulated by the user.
    float offset_0 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current);
    float offset_1 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current + 1);
    float width = offset_1 - offset_0;
    PushItemWidth(width * 0.65f);
    window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f);
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
    window->WorkRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + offset_1 - column_padding;
}

void ImGui::NextColumn()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems || window->DC.CurrentColumns == NULL)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;

    if (columns->Count == 1)
    {
        window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
        IM_ASSERT(columns->Current == 0);
        return;
    }
    PopItemWidth();
    PopClipRect();

    float const column_padding = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
    columns->LineMaxY = ImMax(columns->LineMaxY, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
    if (++columns->Current < columns->Count)
    {
        // Columns 1+ ignore IndentX (by canceling it out)
        // FIXME-COLUMNS: Unnecessary, could be locked?
        window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current) - window->DC.Indent.x + column_padding;
        window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(columns->Current + 1);
    }
    else
    {
        // New row/line
        // Column 0 honor IndentX
        window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f);
        window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(1);
        columns->Current = 0;
        columns->LineMinY = columns->LineMaxY;
    }
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
    window->DC.CursorPos.y = columns->LineMinY;
    window->DC.CurrLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;

    PushColumnClipRect(columns->Current);     // FIXME-COLUMNS: Could it be an overwrite?

    // FIXME-COLUMNS: Share code with BeginColumns() - move code on columns setup.
    float offset_0 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current);
    float offset_1 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current + 1);
    float width = offset_1 - offset_0;
    PushItemWidth(width * 0.65f);
    window->WorkRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + offset_1 - column_padding;
}

void ImGui::EndColumns()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);

    PopItemWidth();
    if (columns->Count > 1)
    {
        PopClipRect();
        window->DrawList->ChannelsMerge();
    }

    const ImGuiColumnsFlags flags = columns->Flags;
    columns->LineMaxY = ImMax(columns->LineMaxY, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
    window->DC.CursorPos.y = columns->LineMaxY;
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_GrowParentContentsSize))
        window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = columns->HostCursorMaxPosX;  // Restore cursor max pos, as columns don't grow parent

    // Draw columns borders and handle resize
    // The IsBeingResized flag ensure we preserve pre-resize columns width so back-and-forth are not lossy
    bool is_being_resized = false;
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoBorder) && !window->SkipItems)
    {
        // We clip Y boundaries CPU side because very long triangles are mishandled by some GPU drivers.
        float const y1 = ImMax(columns->HostCursorPosY, window->ClipRect.Min.y);
        float const y2 = ImMin(window->DC.CursorPos.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y);
        int dragging_column = -1;
        for (int n = 1; n < columns->Count; n++)
        {
            ImGuiColumnData* column = &columns->Columns[n];
            float x = window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n);
            const ImGuiID column_id = columns->ID + ImGuiID(n);
            float const column_hit_hw = COLUMNS_HIT_RECT_HALF_WIDTH;
            const ImRect column_hit_rect(ImVec2(x - column_hit_hw, y1), ImVec2(x + column_hit_hw, y2));
            KeepAliveID(column_id);
            if (IsClippedEx(column_hit_rect, column_id, false))
                continue;

            bool hovered = false, held = false;
            if (!(flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoResize))
            {
                ButtonBehavior(column_hit_rect, column_id, &hovered, &held);
                if (hovered || held)
                    g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW;
                if (held && !(column->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoResize))
                    dragging_column = n;
            }

            // Draw column
            const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered : ImGuiCol_Separator);
            float const xi = IM_FLOOR(x);
            window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(xi, y1 + 1.0f), ImVec2(xi, y2), col);
        }

        // Apply dragging after drawing the column lines, so our rendered lines are in sync with how items were displayed during the frame.
        if (dragging_column != -1)
        {
            if (!columns->IsBeingResized)
                for (int n = 0; n < columns->Count + 1; n++)
                    columns->Columns[n].OffsetNormBeforeResize = columns->Columns[n].OffsetNorm;
            columns->IsBeingResized = is_being_resized = true;
            float x = GetDraggedColumnOffset(columns, dragging_column);
            SetColumnOffset(dragging_column, x);
        }
    }
    columns->IsBeingResized = is_being_resized;

    window->WorkRect = columns->HostWorkRect;
    window->DC.CurrentColumns = NULL;
    window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = 0.0f;
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
}

// [2018-03: This is currently the only public API, while we are working on making BeginColumns/EndColumns user-facing]
void ImGui::Columns(int columns_count, char const* id, bool border)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    IM_ASSERT(columns_count >= 1);

    ImGuiColumnsFlags flags = (border ? 0 : ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoBorder);
    //flags |= ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths; // NB: Legacy behavior
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    if (columns != NULL && columns->Count == columns_count && columns->Flags == flags)
        return;

    if (columns != NULL)
        EndColumns();

    if (columns_count != 1)
        BeginColumns(id, columns_count, flags);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

#pragma warning(pop)